[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2014121697A1 - Method and device for controlling user equipment to take measurements - Google Patents

Method and device for controlling user equipment to take measurements Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014121697A1
WO2014121697A1 PCT/CN2014/071289 CN2014071289W WO2014121697A1 WO 2014121697 A1 WO2014121697 A1 WO 2014121697A1 CN 2014071289 W CN2014071289 W CN 2014071289W WO 2014121697 A1 WO2014121697 A1 WO 2014121697A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
measurement
cell
macro
small cell
downlink signal
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2014/071289
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
谢峰
戴博
李儒岳
鲁照华
陈琳
杨谦
陈玉芹
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
ZTE Corp
Original Assignee
ZTE Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by ZTE Corp filed Critical ZTE Corp
Publication of WO2014121697A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014121697A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/20Selecting an access point

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of wireless communications, and in particular, to a method and apparatus for controlling user equipment (UE, User Equipment) to perform measurements.
  • UE User Equipment
  • a UE In a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, a UE needs to measure a received signal of a serving cell for radio resource management.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the UE does not need to always measure the non-serving cell of the same frequency/inter-frequency, and only needs to detect the reference signal received power of the serving cell (RSRP).
  • RSRP reference signal received power of the serving cell
  • LPN Low Power Node
  • the UE served by the macro cell still uses the RSRP control based on the serving cell to enable the same frequency/different
  • the RSRP of the macro cell measured by the macro UE located at the non-edge location inside the macro cell may be directly higher than the threshold for starting the measurement of the non-serving cell, so the UE will not The measurement of the non-serving cell is initiated, and finally the UE cannot discover the small cell that is close to the hotspot area.
  • the embodiments of the present invention provide a method and a device for controlling a UE to perform measurement, and can detect a small cell in a macro cell in time when the UE does not open the measurement function of the same-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell in real time, and reduce the macro.
  • the load of the cell improves the quality of service to the UE.
  • the embodiment of the invention provides a method for controlling a UE to perform measurement, and the method includes:
  • the UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, and determines whether to open the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the interference strength.
  • the method before the UE measures the interference strength of the signal on the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal, the method further includes:
  • the measurement configuration information is resource location information of the first downlink signal, and includes at least one of the following: subframe configuration information, frequency domain configuration information, and port information; the first downlink signal includes: channel state information reference Signal CSI-RS, or cell level reference signal CRS, or synchronization signal SS, or discovery signal.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference Signal
  • CRS cell level reference signal
  • SS synchronization signal
  • the UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, and includes:
  • the UE measures the reception strength on the RE corresponding to the zero-power first downlink signal and uses it as the interference strength.
  • the UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, and includes:
  • the UE measures the received strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal and the received power of the first downlink signal, and uses the difference between the two as the interference strength.
  • the UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, and includes:
  • the UE measures the reception strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal after performing the interference cancellation operation on the first downlink signal, and uses the received strength as the interference strength.
  • determining, according to the interference strength, whether to enable measurement of a non-serving cell includes:
  • the UE measures the received power of the specified second downlink signal, and determines whether to measure the non-serving cell according to a ratio between the received power of the second downlink signal and the interference strength;
  • the received power of the second downlink signal is a reference signal received power RSRP, or a channel state information reference signal received power CSI-RSRP, or a synchronous signal received power.
  • the determining whether to enable the measurement of the non-serving cell includes: when the UE determines that the interference strength is higher or lower than a threshold for starting measurement on the non-serving cell, the non-serving cell Make measurements.
  • the determining whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell includes: using the interference strength, a ratio between a received power of the second downlink signal and an interference strength, RSRP, RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP At least two parameters control the measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the method further includes: enabling measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • the measuring the non-serving cell includes:
  • the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell by itself
  • the UE reports a measurement result or sends a strong interference indication to the serving base station, and the serving base station configures measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the method before the UE receives the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal, the method further includes:
  • the serving base station corresponding to the macro cell in which the UE is located and the small base station corresponding to the small cell coordinate the configuration of the first downlink signal through the X2 interface, or the S1 interface, or the network management OAM, or the UE.
  • the resources of the first downlink signal include: resources of a licensed frequency band and resources of an unlicensed frequency band;
  • the method further includes: selecting the UE to aggregate the carrier, and activating and configuring the secondary cell scell.
  • An embodiment of the present invention further provides an apparatus for controlling a UE to perform measurement, where the apparatus includes: a measurement module and a decision module;
  • a measurement module configured to measure an interference strength on the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal, and send the interference strength to the decision module;
  • the decision module is configured to determine whether to open the measurement of the non-serving cell according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE sent by the measurement module.
  • the device further includes: a receiving module, configured to receive and save measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal, and send the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal to the measurement module; correspondingly, the measurement The module is configured to receive and save the measurement configuration information sent by the receiving module, where the measurement configuration information is resource location information of the first downlink signal, and includes at least one of the following: subframe configuration information, frequency domain configuration information, and port
  • the first downlink signal includes: a channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, or a cell level reference signal CRS, or a synchronization signal SS, or a discovery signal.
  • the measuring module is configured to measure the receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the zero-power first downlink signal and use the interference strength as the interference strength.
  • the measuring module is configured to measure a receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal and a received power of the first downlink signal, and use the difference between the two as the interference strength.
  • the measuring module is configured to measure a receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal after performing the interference canceling operation on the first downlink signal, and use the receiving strength as the interference strength.
  • the determining module is configured to measure a received power of the specified second downlink signal, and determine whether to enable the right or not according to a ratio between the received power of the second downlink signal and the interference strength and a determination criterion.
  • the determining module is configured to execute a determining criterion, where the determining criterion includes: when the UE determines that the interference strength is higher or lower than the starting to measure the non-serving cell For the limit, measurements are made for non-serving cells.
  • the determining module is configured to execute a determining criterion, where the determining criterion includes: using the interference strength, a ratio between a receiving strength of the second downlink signal and an interference strength, RSRP, RSRQ And at least two parameters in the CSI-RSRP, controlling the measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the determining module is configured to enable measurement of the non-serving cell, where the measuring the non-serving cell is: the UE starts the measurement of the non-serving cell by itself; or The serving base station reports a measurement result or a strong interference indication so that the serving base station configures measurements for non-serving cells.
  • the resources of the first downlink signal include: resources of a licensed frequency band and resources of an unlicensed frequency band;
  • the determining module is configured to: when the resource of the first downlink signal is a resource of the unlicensed frequency band, select, according to the interference strength, whether to enable measurement of a non-serving cell, select an aggregate carrier, and Activate and configure the secondary cell scell.
  • the method and device for controlling measurement by a UE can determine whether a current UE is close to a small cell in a macro cell by measuring a received strength of a signal on a resource unit (RE) corresponding to the specified first downlink signal. If it is close, the signal measurement on the small cell is started. Otherwise, the signal measurement on the small cell is not turned on, so that the measurement function of the same-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell can be started in real time, and the macro cell is timely discovered.
  • the small cell in the network reduces the load on the macro cell and improves the quality of service to the UE.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart 1 of a method for controlling a UE to perform measurement according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for controlling a measurement performed by a UE according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • 3 is a schematic flowchart 2 of a method for controlling measurement by a UE according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of resource coordination when a macro cell and a small cell coexist in an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a macro cell and a small embodiment according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of resource coordination when a macro cell and a small cell coexist in the embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. detailed description
  • the method for controlling the measurement by the UE in the embodiment of the present invention includes the following steps: Step 101: The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal.
  • the first downlink signal may be a zero-power downlink signal of the current serving cell, or may be a non-zero-power downlink signal of the current serving cell; wherein the zero-power downlink signal may be: a zero-power CSI-RS ( Including CSI Interference Measurement Resource (CSI-IMR), or zero-power CRS, or zero-power SS, or zero-power discovery signal; the non-zero-power downlink signal may be: non-zero-power CSI-RS, or non-zero Power CRS, or non-zero power sync signal, or non-zero power discovery signal.
  • CSI-IMR Including CSI Interference Measurement Resource
  • the non-zero-power downlink signal may be: non-zero-power CSI-RS, or non-zero Power CRS, or non-zero power sync signal, or non-zero power discovery signal.
  • the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal is configured by the UE according to the measured configuration information of the received first downlink signal;
  • the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal may be sent to the UE by the macro base station, and includes: a resource configuration list of the first downlink signal, subframe configuration information, and a threshold for starting measurement on the non-serving cell. Value, etc.
  • the base station of the serving cell further performs resource coordination with the small base station of the small cell, and may perform through an X2 interface, an S1 interface, or through a network management (OAM) or even a UE (but not limited to these interfaces).
  • OAM network management
  • Step 102 The UE determines, according to the interference strength, whether to enable measurement of a non-serving cell.
  • the measuring module 21 is configured to measure the received strength of the signal on the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal, and send the received strength of the signal to the decision module 22;
  • the decision module 22 is configured to determine whether to open the measurement of the non-serving cell according to the receiving strength of the first downlink signal on the RE sent by the measuring module 21.
  • the device further includes: a receiving module 23 configured to receive and save measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal, and send the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal to the measurement module 21; correspondingly, the measurement module 21 And configuring, to receive and save the measurement configuration information sent by the receiving module 23, where the measurement configuration information is resource location information of the first downlink signal, and includes at least one of the following: subframe configuration information, frequency domain configuration information, Port information; the first downlink signal includes: a CSI-RS, or a CRS, or an SS, or a discovery signal.
  • the measuring module 21 is configured to measure a receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal and a received power of the first downlink signal, and use the difference between the two as the interference strength.
  • the measuring module 21 is configured to measure a receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal after performing the interference cancellation operation on the first downlink signal, and use the received strength as the interference strength.
  • the determining module 22 is configured to measure a received power of the specified second downlink signal, determine, according to a ratio between the received power of the second downlink signal and the interference strength, and a determination criterion, whether to enable the non-serving cell
  • the receiving power of the second downlink signal is a reference signal received power RSRP, or a channel state information reference signal received power CSI-RSRP, or a synchronization signal received power.
  • the determining module 22 is configured to execute a determining criterion, where the determining criterion includes: when the UE determines that the interference strength is higher or lower than a threshold value for starting to measure a non-serving cell , measure the non-serving cell.
  • the determining module 22 is configured to execute a determining criterion, where the determining criterion includes: using the interference strength, a ratio between a receiving strength of the second downlink 't number and an interference strength, At least two parameters of RSRP, RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP control the measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the determining module 22 is configured to enable measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the measuring the non-serving cell includes: the UE starts the measurement of the non-serving cell by itself; or the UE reports to the serving base station.
  • the measurement result or strong interference indication is such that the serving base station configures measurements for non-serving cells.
  • Both the measurement module 21 and the decision module 22 described above can be implemented by hardware such as a CPU or a DSP.
  • Embodiment 1
  • FIG. 3 An embodiment of the method for controlling the UE to perform measurement may be as shown in FIG. 3, and a schematic diagram of the current macro cell and the small cell picol and pico2 coexisting is shown in FIG. 4, wherein the Macro Cell has a larger The coverage, pico l and pico2 have a smaller coverage.
  • Step 301 Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.
  • the macro cell and the small cell coordinate, for example, through an X2 interface, an S1 interface, or through an network management (OAM), or a UE (not limited to a UE that needs to perform small cell discovery).
  • OAM network management
  • a UE not limited to a UE that needs to perform small cell discovery.
  • the macro cell can pass the X2 Setup flow message, ENB.
  • the configuration update process message indicates the configuration information of the zero-power CSI-RS of the macro cell to the small cell (the macro cell can also be prepared by handover)
  • the RRC information between the base stations carried in the flow message for example, AS-Config notifies the small cell of the configuration information of the zero-power CSI-RS of the macro cell, or the macro cell recommends the non-zero power to the small cell (the small cell) through the X2 message.
  • the configuration information of the CSI-RS after receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own non-zero power CSI-RS to complete the coordination between the cells.
  • the small cell can also indicate its non-zero power CSI to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setu flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message.
  • the macro cell then configures the corresponding zero-power CSI-RS measurement for the UE through the air interface.
  • a method for coordinating inter-cell configuration through an S1 interface or other interfaces includes: The MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW) delivers the configuration of the zero-power CSI-RS or the configuration of the recommended non-zero-power CSI-RS to the opposite base station, and/or the small base station passes the MME and/or the gateway ( The gateway, for example HeNB GW, S 1 GW ), communicates the configuration of the non-zero power CSI-RS or the configuration of the recommended zero power CSI-RS to the macro base station.
  • the gateway for example HeNB GW, S 1 GW
  • the method for coordinating inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates a zero-power CSI-RS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates a non-zero-power CSI-RS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the small cell to the macro base station.
  • the zero-power CSI-RS configuration information sends the zero-power CSI-RS configuration information of the macro cell to the small base station.
  • the specific manner of transmitting the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: the macro UE sends the zero-power CSI-RS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell after switching to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell.
  • the non-zero-power CSI-RS configuration information configured by the small cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive system information of the small cell, including non-zero-power CSI-RS configuration information, by using a measurement process, and Reported by the UE to the macro base station.
  • the small cell may also be in the macro cell.
  • the data (data) or the dummy data (dummy) is transmitted at the RE location corresponding to the ZP CSI-RS.
  • the data is normally transmitted, otherwise the dummy RE is sent; or the pico always sends the dummy RE, the dummy RE at the RE position corresponding to the macro cell ZP CSI-RS.
  • Data can be transferred normally on other REs.
  • the small cells may also be grouped, and the CSI-RS time-frequency resources of the small cells in the same group are aligned, or both correspond to the same ZP CSI-RS configuration of the macro cell.
  • the basis of the grouping may be determined according to the deployment needs, for example: grouping according to geographical area, grouping according to the power size or coverage of the small base station, grouping according to the type of backhaul, or CSG according to the small cell (closed user group, closed Subscriber group) attribute grouping, for example, open mode small cell, closed mode small cell, hybrid mode small cell, where any user of open small cell can access normally, closed type Small cells can only be used by member users. Access, non-member users can not access, hybrid small cells preferential access and services for member users, non-member users can also access.
  • the macro base station can be configured with multiple
  • each measurement configuration can have different ZP-CSI-RS resource configurations.
  • Step 302 The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.
  • the measurement configuration information includes: resource configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information) of the first downlink signal, where the zero power resource configuration list and the zero power subframe configuration information are included.
  • the measurement configuration information further includes a start measurement threshold for controlling whether to initiate measurement for the non-serving cell, and/or parameter information k for filtering the measured value.
  • the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station may be: the macro base station sends the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration).
  • RRCConnectionReconfiguration a radio link reconfiguration message
  • the first downlink signal is a zero power CSI-RS
  • each transmission node has a downlink resource block (RB), and the RB is composed of a series of REs, and each RE is composed of (k, 1) Two-dimensional coordinate representation, where k represents the subcarrier index of the frequency domain and 1 represents the symbol index of the time domain.
  • k represents the subcarrier index of the frequency domain
  • 1 represents the symbol index of the time domain.
  • the two REs corresponding to the third subcarrier from the top correspond to the zero-power CSI-RS of the small cell, and the fourth subcarrier corresponding to the top from the top.
  • the 2 REs correspond to the non-zero power CSI-RS of the small cell. That is, the RE position of the zero-power CSI-RS of the Macro Cell corresponds to the position of the non-zero power CSI-RS of picol and pico2, and the RE position of the non-zero power CSI-RS of the macro corresponds to the picol and pico2 The location of the power CSI-RS.
  • the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal is indicated by the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal that is sent by the macro base station of the serving cell.
  • the zero base power CSI-RS measurement configuration of the macro base station for the UE may further include a bandwidth of zero power CSI-RSSI measurement;
  • the configuration of the bandwidth measured by the zero-power CSI-RSSI includes measuring a center frequency point and a bandwidth (the number of RBs), an RB start index and an end index, an RB start index, and an RB number, and the like. In this way, even if the macro cell and the small cell are different in frequency, as long as the spectrums of the macro cell and the small cell overlap, it is possible to determine whether or not the small cell of the different frequency is close by measuring on the overlapping bandwidth, thereby starting the inter-frequency. Measurement of small cells.
  • Step 303 The UE measures the receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the zero-power CSI-RS according to the measurement configuration information.
  • the measurement includes: the UE is based on physical layer measurement, that is, zero power CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth.
  • Step 304 The UE determines, according to the receiving strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the UE determines whether the receiving strength of the first downlink signal on the RE is not lower than or higher than a starting measurement threshold, and if yes, the UE starts to measure the non-serving cell;
  • the UE does not measure non-serving cells or small cells of the same frequency and different frequency.
  • the macro UE0 is far away from picol and pico2, and the measured reception strength of the first downlink signal on the RE may be lower than the starting measurement threshold, so the non-monthly The measurement of the cell (or small cell); while the macro UE1 and the macro UE2 are close to picol and pico2, respectively, the received downlink signal on the RE has a higher reception strength, and as they are close to picol and pico2
  • the UE1 and the UE2 each start a non-serving cell (or a small cell) when the received strength of the first downlink signal on the RE that is measured by each of them is greater than the start measurement threshold. Measurement.
  • the UE starts to perform measurement on the non-serving cell, and includes: the UE directly starts to perform measurement on the non-serving cell; or, when the UE determines that the reporting condition of the base station configuration is met, the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station, and the serving base station performs non-serving according to the measurement result.
  • the measurement configuration of the cell (or small cell) and/or the initiation of the measurement is not limited to: the measurement configuration of the cell (or small cell) and/or the initiation of the measurement.
  • the above measurement based on ZP-CSI-RSSI reflects the received signal strength of the non-serving cell.
  • the status information reference signal reception quality (CSI-RSRQ) is the channel state information reference signal reception power (CSI-RSRP, and the physical layer measurement is based on the power contribution of the CSI-RS on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth.
  • Linear average is the ratio of the interference intensity ZP-CSI-RSSI.
  • the CSI-RSRQ calculated by the UE is the ratio of CSI-RSRP and ZP-CSI-RSSI measured by the UE on different REs. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the signal strength of the non-serving cell. Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the measurement of the CSI-RSRQ defined above. When the CSI-RSRQ is lower than (or less than or equal to) the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell.
  • the performance of small cell discovery can also be improved through a large-scale coordination, for example, aligning REs corresponding to zero-power CSI-RSs of multiple Macro cells, so that the UE detects the ZP.
  • the CSI-RSSI only reflects the power strength of the small cell, which can improve the accuracy of starting small cell measurements.
  • the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone, the small cell discovery can be performed in the non-serving cell measurement, and the measurement of the non-serving cell not only needs to consider the needs of small cell discovery, but also needs to be considered in the macro.
  • the need for UE mobility (e.g., handover) for small intervals, for which a joint decision criterion can be employed.
  • the joint decision criterion includes: combining ZP-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ with at least two of RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ or CSI-RSRP-based measurements to control a co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell Measurement of (adjacent cell).
  • mode 1 if ZP-CSI-RSSI>threshold, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start to non-service Measurement of the cell;
  • Mode 2 When ZP-CSI-RSSI>threshold, or CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 3 If CSI-RSRQ ⁇ thresholdl or RSRP is smaller than a certain The threshold configured by the base station starts the measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • mode 4 If the CSI-RSRQ ⁇ threshold1, or the CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, the measurement of the non-serving cell is started.
  • RSRP CRS-based
  • RSRQ RSRQ
  • CSI-RSRP CSI-RSRP
  • the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined or
  • the joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (for example, measurement of ZP-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ).
  • UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control.
  • the base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • this method it is also conceivable to use the increment of the measured value as the discriminating condition for starting the intra-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called the incremental decision method.
  • the measured ZP-CSI-RSSI increase means that the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced in intensity
  • ZP-CSI-RSSI continues to increase
  • the distance is closer and closer to another cell, and the measurement may be considered; or, the decrease of CSI-RSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the signal strength of the serving cell decreases.
  • the CSI-RSRQ continues to decrease, the distance may be indicated.
  • the serving cell is getting farther and farther, and getting closer and closer to the neighboring cell, you can consider starting the measurement. Incremental decision method and intensity judgment method can also be linked Together, it is determined whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.
  • Fig. 5 is a diagram showing the coexistence of a macro cell (macro in the figure) and a small cell (pico l and pico2 in the figure).
  • the macro has a larger coverage, and pico l and pico2 have a smaller coverage (because of its smaller transmission power).
  • the macro UE Due to the huge difference in the coverage of the macro cell and the small cell, the macro UE continuously measures the non-serving cell (including the small cell) at any place, which results in a large user equipment power consumption and computational overhead. Therefore, it is necessary to have a more power-saving method to judge whether the macro user equipment is close to the small cell, thereby starting measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) including the small cell.
  • each transmission node has a downlink RB
  • the resource block RB is composed of a series of resource units RE
  • each RE is represented by (k, 1) two-dimensional coordinates, where k represents a frequency domain subcarrier (Subcarrier ) index, 1 represents the symbol index of the time domain.
  • k represents a frequency domain subcarrier (Subcarrier ) index
  • 1 represents the symbol index of the time domain.
  • the number from the top to the bottom (counting from 1) corresponds to the non-zero power cell-level reference signal (CRS) of the macro cell.
  • the RE corresponding to the fourth subcarrier of the upper and lower numbers corresponds to a zero power CRS.
  • the RE corresponding to the 4th subcarrier from top to bottom corresponds to the non-zero power CRS of the small cell. That is, the E position of the macro zero power CRS corresponds to the position of the non-zero power CRS of picol and pico2.
  • Step 401 Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.
  • the resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell is performed through the X2 interface, the S1 interface, the network management (OAM), and even the UE (not limited to the UE that needs to perform small cell discovery).
  • OAM network management
  • the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message.
  • Configuration information of the zero-power CRS of the cell (the macro cell can also allocate the zero-power CRS of the macro cell through the RC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config
  • the small cell informs the small cell), or the macro cell recommends the configuration information of the non-zero power CRS (small cell) to the small cell through the X2 message, and the small cell can perform its own non-zero power CRS after receiving the configuration information. Configure to complete coordination between cells.
  • the small cell can also indicate its non-zero power CRS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setup flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message.
  • the configuration, the macro cell then configures the corresponding zero-power CRS measurement for the UE through the air interface.
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes the macro base station transmitting a zero-power CRS configuration or recommending a non-zero-power CRS to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW) Configuration, and Z or, the small base station transmits the configuration of the non-zero power CRS or the configuration of the recommended zero power CRS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW).
  • the gateway eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW
  • the method for coordinating inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates a zero-power CRS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates a non-zero-power CRS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the non-zero-power CRS configuration of the small cell to the macro base station.
  • the specific mode of transmitting the macro between the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the zero-power CRS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell.
  • the non-zero-power CRS configuration information configured by the small cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the non-zero-power CRS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station.
  • the manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.
  • the small cell may also transmit data at the RE location corresponding to the macro cell ZP CRS. (data) or imitation data (dummy). For example, if the small cell on the PRB corresponding to the measurement bandwidth has data transmission, the data is normally sent, otherwise the dummy RE is sent; or the pico always sends the dummy RE and the dummy RE at the RE position corresponding to the macro cell ZP CS. The data can be transmitted normally on E.
  • the performance of small cell discovery can also be improved through a large-scale coordination, for example, aligning REs corresponding to zero-power CRSs of multiple macro cells (constituting a coordinated discovery area) (macro).
  • the small interval can transmit the zero-power CRS configuration information through the X2 interface or the network management system, so that the ZP CRS measured by the UE reflects only the power strength of the small cell, which can improve the accuracy of starting the small cell measurement.
  • the small cells may also be grouped, and the CRS time-frequency resources of the small cells in the same group are aligned, or both correspond to the same ZP CRS configuration of the macro cell.
  • the basis of the grouping may be determined according to the deployment needs, for example, according to the geographical area, or according to the power level or coverage of the small base station, or grouped according to the type of backhaul, or according to the CSG of the small cell (closed subscriber group, closed subscriber Group ) attribute grouping, for example, open mode small cell, closed mode small cell, hybrid mode small cell, where any user of open small cell can access normally, closed small Only the member users can access the cell, and the non-member users cannot access the hybrid cell.
  • the hybrid small cell preferentially accesses and services the member users, and the non-member users can also access the cell.
  • Step 402 The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.
  • the measurement configuration information may include: configuration information of zero-power CRS (interference measurement resource configuration information); configuration information of the zero-power CRS includes zero-power subframe configuration information, zero-power CRS frequency domain offset, or The configuration information of the zero-power CRS corresponding to the zero-power CRS frequency domain offset may also include the port number or the port number.
  • configuration information of zero-power CRS interference measurement resource configuration information
  • configuration information of the zero-power CRS includes zero-power subframe configuration information, zero-power CRS frequency domain offset
  • the configuration information of the zero-power CRS corresponding to the zero-power CRS frequency domain offset may also include the port number or the port number.
  • the measurement configuration information may further include: a threshold parameter (control) for controlling whether to start measurement on the non-serving cell, and parameter information k for filtering the measurement value.
  • a threshold parameter control
  • parameter information k for filtering the measurement value.
  • the macro base station can not only measure the default bandwidth for the ZP CS measurement configuration of the macro UE, and the macro base station can also configure the bandwidth measured by the ZP-CRS-RS SI.
  • the configuration can be expressed by the following method, for example, measuring the center frequency + bandwidth ( RB number), RB start index and end index, RB start index and RB number, and so on. In this way, even if the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies (that is, the center frequencies of the two cells are different), as long as the spectrum of the macro cell and the small cell overlap, the bandwidth can be over the overlapping bandwidth.
  • the measurement determines whether the macro UE is close to the small cell of the different frequency, thereby starting the measurement of the small cell of the different frequency.
  • the receiving configuration information sent by the UE to the macro base station may be: receiving, by the UE, the measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration), step 403: the UE measures zero according to the measurement configuration information.
  • RRCConnectionReconfiguration radio link reconfiguration message
  • the macro UE receives the signal on the RE corresponding to the zero-power CRS (or interference measurement resource) (for example, the RE corresponding to the fourth sub-carrier of the symbol 0 from the top in FIG. 3)
  • the intensity is measured. Since the macro cell has zero power on these REs, it means that the received signal strength measured by the macro UE on these REs represents the signal strength of the non-serving cell (in the example of FIG. 4, the signals of the CRS including picol and pico2 are included). Intensity), or it can also be called interference strength (for the serving cell, the signals of these non-serving cells are interference).
  • This measurement can be referred to as the zero-power-CRS-based SSI (abbreviated as ZP-CRS-RSSI) based on the zero-power small-area reference signal.
  • the new measurement result, F Pen is the updated filtered measurement result, which is the measurement result after the last filtration.
  • Step 404 The UE determines, according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, perform step 405; otherwise, end the processing process.
  • the macro UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell), otherwise the macro UE may not measure the same frequency. And non-serving cells or small cells with different frequencies (may also be non-service small in other systems) District, or small community).
  • the macro UE0 is far away from picol and pico2, and the measured ZP-CRS-RSSI may be lower than the threshold, so the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be initiated (small cell
  • the measurement configuration may be the same as or different from the measurement configuration of the non-serving cell; and the macro UE1 and macro UE2 are close to picol and pico2, respectively, and the detected ZP-CRS-RSSI is due to the power of the CRS including the pico (that is, the interference strength).
  • UE1, UE2 will each initiate a non-serving cell Measurement of (or small cell), thereby discovering and identifying a non-serving cell or a small cell (i.e., picol or pico2 in the figure) through cell search.
  • the measurement of the physical layer is based on a linear average of the power contribution of the CRS on the RE corresponding to the CRS on the measured bandwidth).
  • the RSRQ* calculated by the UE is the ratio of the RSRP and the ZP-CRS-RSSI measured by the UE on different REs. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the signal strength of the non-serving cell. Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the measurement of the RSRQ* defined above. For example, when the RSRQ* is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell.
  • the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • this method it is also conceivable to use the increment of the measured value as one of the discriminating conditions for starting the intra-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called an incremental decision method.
  • the measured increase of ZP-CSI-RSSI means that the strength of the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced, if the ZP-CSI-RSSI continues to enhance, May indicate that it is getting closer and closer to another cell, you can consider starting Measurement; or, the decrease of CSI-RSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the serving cell signal strength decreases. If the CSI-RSRQ continues to decrease, it may indicate that the distance from the serving cell is getting farther and farther, and the distance from the neighboring cell is coming. The closer you are, the more you can consider starting the measurement.
  • the incremental decision method and the strength determination method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.
  • the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone, and small cell discovery can be performed in non-serving cell measurement, while the measurement of non-serving cells needs to consider not only the needs of small cell discovery but also the UE between macro cells.
  • the need for mobility eg, handover
  • a joint decision criterion ie, measurement of ZP-CRS-RSSI or RSRQ*, RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, or CSI-RSRP-based measurements.
  • mode 1 If the ZP-C S-RS SI>threshold, or the RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 2 When ZP-CRS-RSSI>threshold, or CSI-RSRP If the threshold is less than the configuration of a certain base station, start the measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 3 If RSRQ* ⁇ threshold1, or the RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start the measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 4 If RSRQ* ⁇ Threshold1, or CSI-RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, and starts measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the start of the measurement is only for small cell discovery, it is also possible to combine the measurement of ZP-CRS-RS SI or RSRQ* with at least two of RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ or CSI-RSRP-based measurements.
  • CRS-based RSRP
  • RSRQ CSI-RSRP-based measurements.
  • the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four methods is changed to the "and" relationship.
  • the joint decision criterion is performed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied.
  • the specific example is as follows: First or default, the CRS-based RSRP criterion is used, when the RSRS measurement value is smaller than the RSRP.
  • a joint decision criterion is then performed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement, such as a ZP-CRS-RSSI or RSRQ* measurement.
  • UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control.
  • the base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including adio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element. Control element, downlink control information (abbreviated as DCI).
  • RRC resource Control
  • DCI downlink control information
  • Step 405 The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the method for specifically starting the measurement of the non-serving cell (or the small cell) is as follows: In the first mode, the serving base station has configured the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to specifically The determination of the condition can be started. In the second mode, the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (such as a strong interference indication) after determining that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, and the base station according to the measurement result or a specific indication (for example, strong) Interference indication) Perform measurement configuration (and/or start of measurement) of a non-serving cell (or small cell).
  • a specific indication such as a strong interference indication
  • the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect the small cell in time and improve the quality of service (including the throughput) by switching/diverting to the small cell or using the small cell as the secondary carrier to reduce the load of the macro cell. .
  • Fig. 6 is a diagram showing the coexistence of a macro cell (macro in the figure) and a small cell (icol and pico2 in the figure).
  • the macro has a larger coverage, and the coverage of picol and pico2 is smaller (due to its smaller transmission power). Due to the huge difference in the coverage of the macro cell and the small cell, the macro UE continuously measures the non-serving cell (including the small cell) at any place, which results in a large user equipment power consumption and computational overhead. Therefore, it is necessary to have a more power-saving method to determine whether the macro user equipment is close to the small cell, thereby starting measurement of the non-serving cell including the small cell.
  • each transmission node (subframe 0, or subframe 5) has a downlink resource block (abbreviated as RB), and the resource block RB is composed of a series of resource units RE.
  • each RE is represented by (k, 1) two-dimensional coordinates, where k represents the subcarrier index of the frequency domain, and 1 represents the symbol index of the time domain.
  • SSS zero-power secondary synchronization
  • PSS primary Synchronization signal
  • Step 501 Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.
  • the step 501 is an optional step; specifically, through an X2 interface, an S1 interface, or through an OAM or even a UE (not limited to a UE that needs to perform small cell discovery).
  • the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to the small cell through the X2 Setu flow message, the ENB Configuration Update flow message, or the X2 message such as the Load Information message.
  • the configuration information of the zero-power SS of the cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the zero-power SS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell passes the above
  • the X2 message recommends the configuration information of the non-zero power SS (small cell) to the small cell. After receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own non-zero power SS to complete the coordination between the cells.
  • the small cell can also indicate its non-zero power SS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setu flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message.
  • the configuration, the macro cell then configures the corresponding zero-power SS measurement for the UE through the air interface.
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes the macro base station transmitting a zero-power SS configuration or recommending a non-zero-power SS configuration to the opposite base station through the MME and/or a gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW).
  • a gateway eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW
  • the small base station transmits the configuration of the non-zero power SS or the configuration of the recommended zero power SS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW).
  • a method for coordinating inter-cell configuration through a network management system includes: The system indicates a zero-power SS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates a non-zero-power SS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the non-zero-power SS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the zero-power SS configuration of the macro cell to the small base station. information.
  • the specific mode of transmitting the macro between the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the zero-power SS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell.
  • the non-zero-power SS configuration information configured by the small cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the non-zero-power SS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station.
  • the manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.
  • the performance of small cell discovery can also be improved through a wide range of coordination, for example, aligning REs corresponding to zero-power PSS/SSS of multiple macro cells (constituting a coordinated discovery area) (The zero-power PSS/SSS configuration information can be transmitted between the macro cells through the X2 interface or the network management system, etc.), so that the ZP SS-RSSI measured by the UE only reflects the power strength of the small cell, which can improve the accuracy of starting the small cell measurement. .
  • Step 502 The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.
  • the macro base station first performs measurement configuration for the macro UE, and includes configuration information of the zero power SS (interference measurement resource configuration information) in the measurement configuration information, and configuration information of the zero power SS includes zero power subframe configuration information.
  • the zero-power PSS/SSS has a small interval, for example, a zero-power PSS/SSS occurs every 10 frames, that is, 100 ms or more, and the zero-power PSS/SSS has little effect on other UEs.
  • Other methods can also to reduce the impact on other UEs, for example, zero power of PSS/SSS can be alternately generated, for example, zero-power PSS occurs when system frame number modulo 10 is equal to 0, and zero-power SSS is when system frame number modulo 10 is equal to 5.
  • zero-power PSS and zero-power SSS can also be configured at different times, for example, only zero-power PSS is configured, and once every 100 ms.
  • the UE When only zero-power PSS or zero-power SSS is configured, the UE only measures zero-power.
  • the signal strength measurement information on the RE corresponding to the synchronization signal further includes a threshold parameter (threshold) for controlling whether to start measurement on the non-monthly service cell.
  • the measurement configuration information may also include parameter information k for filtering the measured values.
  • the macro base station is configured to measure the ZP PSS/SSS measurement of the macro UE.
  • the default bandwidth of the PSS/SSS is 6 RBs.
  • the macro base station When the center frequency of the small cell is different from that of the macro base station, the macro base station The center frequency of the ZP-SS-RSSI measurement can also be configured so that the RB measured by the ZP-SS-RSSI is the center 6 RBs of the small cell (the macro base station can know the center frequency of the small cell through the X2 interface). In this way, even if the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies (that is, the center frequency points of the two are different), as long as the spectrum of the macro cell and the small cell overlap, the macro UE can be determined by measurement on the overlapping bandwidth. Close to the small cell of the different frequency, thereby starting the measurement of the small cell with different frequency.
  • the macro UE receives the radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnection econfiguration) of the macro base station, and includes the above measurement configuration information.
  • RRCConnection econfiguration radio link reconfiguration message
  • Step 503 The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the zero power PSS/SSS according to the measurement configuration information.
  • the macro UE measures the received strength of the signal on the RE corresponding to the zero power PSS/SSS (or interference measurement resource) (eg, including symbol 5 symbol 6 in Figure 6). Since the macro cell has zero power on these REs, it means that the received signal strength measured by the macro UE on these REs represents the signal strength of the non-serving cell (for example, in Figure 6, the PSS/SSS including picol and pico2) The signal strength), or it can also be called the interference strength (for the serving cell, the signals of these non-serving cells are interference).
  • This measurement can be referred to as a zero-power-SS-based RSSI (abbreviated as ZP SS-RSSI).
  • the filtered result after the new filter is the result of the last filter.
  • Step 504 The UE determines, according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, perform step 505; otherwise, end the processing process.
  • a non-serving cell or a small cell may also be a non-serving cell of another standard, or a small cell).
  • the macro UE0 is far away from picol and pico2, and the measured ZP-SS-RSSI may be lower than the threshold, so the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be started (small cell
  • the measurement configuration may be the same as or different from the measurement configuration of the non-serving cell; while the macro UE1 and macro UE2 are close to picol and pico2, respectively, and the measured ZP-SS-RSSI includes the power of the PSO/SSS including the pico (ie The interference strength) will be relatively high, and will tend to increase as they are close to picol and pico2.
  • UE1 and UE2 When their respective measured ZP-SS-RSSI is greater than threshold, UE1 and UE2 will each start the right Measurement of a serving cell (or small cell) to discover and identify a non-serving cell or a small cell (i.e., picol or pico2 in the figure) through cell search.
  • a serving cell or small cell
  • a small cell i.e., picol or pico2 in the figure
  • the above measurement based on ZP-SS-RSSI reflects the received signal strength (ie, the interference strength) of the non-serving cell, and it is considered that the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell is usually used for decision making in radio resource management ( For example, switching the decision), so it can also be defined
  • SSRQ SSRP/ZP-SS-RSSI, where SSRQ (synchronization signal received quality) is the newly defined synchronization signal receiving shield, SSRP (synchronization signal received power) is the synchronization signal receiving power (corresponding to non-zero power PSS/SSS)
  • SSRQ synchronization signal received quality
  • SSRP synchronization signal received power
  • PSS/SSS synchronization signal receiving power
  • the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the power contribution of the synchronization signal on the RE corresponding to the SS over the measured bandwidth.
  • the SSRQ calculated by the UE is the ratio of the SSRP and the ZP-SS-RSSI measured by the UE on different REs. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the signal strength of the non-serving cell.
  • the UE can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the measurement of the SSRQ defined above. For example, when the SSRQ is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell.
  • the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • this method is called an incremental decision method.
  • the measured ZP-SS-RSSI increase means that the non-serving cell signal (or interference) strength is enhanced, if ZP-SS-RSSI is continuously enhanced , may indicate that it is getting closer to another cell, and may consider starting the measurement; or, the decrease of SSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the signal strength of the serving cell decreases. If the SSRQ continues to decrease, it may indicate that the distance from the serving cell is more The farther it is, and the closer it is to the neighboring cell, the start of the measurement can be considered.
  • the incremental decision method and the strength determination method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.
  • the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone, and small cell discovery can be performed in non-serving cell measurement, while the measurement of non-serving cells needs to consider not only the needs of small cell discovery but also the UE between macro cells.
  • the need for mobility (such as handover), for which a decision criterion can be used, that is, the measurement of ZP-SS-RSSI or SSRQ is combined with at least two of RSRP (CRS-based), RS Q or SSRP measurements. Measurement of co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cells (adjacent cells).
  • mode 1 If ZP-SS-RSSI>threshold, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 2 When ZP-SS-RSSI>threshold, or SSRP is less than a certain threshold (may be configured by the base station), initiate measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 3 If SSRQ ⁇ thresholdl, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 4 If SSRQ ⁇ thresholdl, or The SSRP is less than a certain threshold (possibly configured by the base station) to initiate measurements on non-serving cells.
  • the measurement of ZP-SS-RSSI or SSRQ can also be combined with RSRP (CRS-based) or RSRQ, SSRP measurements to control the measurement of small cells.
  • RSRP CRS-based
  • RSRQ SSRP measurements
  • the above criterion can be executed under specific conditions.
  • the criterion of a single condition can be used first or by default, and the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied.
  • the specific example is as follows: first or default CRS-based RSRP decision criterion, when the CRS measurement value RSRP is less than a predefined or base station configured threshold, then the joint determination criterion is executed Whether a co-frequency or inter-frequency measurement is initiated is determined by a new measurement, such as a ZP-SS-RSSI or SSRQ measurement.
  • UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control.
  • the base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC MAC layer control element control element
  • Step 505 The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the method for specifically starting the measurement of the non-serving cell (or the small cell) is as follows: In the first mode, the serving base station has configured the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to specifically The determining of the condition can be started. In the second manner, the UE reports the measurement result or the strong interference indication to the serving base station after determining that the reporting condition is met (the configuration of the base station), and the base station performs the non-serving cell (or small cell) according to the measurement result or the strong interference indication. Measurement configuration (and / or measurement startup).
  • the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect the small cell in time and improve the quality of service (including the throughput) by switching/diverting to the small cell or using the small cell as the secondary carrier to reduce the load of the macro cell. .
  • the method based on the discovery signal is similar to the method based on the synchronization signal.
  • the main difference lies in the details of the signal pattern, the transmission period, the bandwidth of the discovery signal and the synchronization signal, and the macro base station also needs to send the configuration information of the zero power discovery signal to
  • the macro UE may include information such as the period of the discovery signal, the time offset, and the bandwidth.
  • the basic process is similar to the process based on the synchronization signal, and details are not described herein again.
  • Step 601 Resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.
  • step 601 is an optional step; specifically includes:
  • the PSS/SSS of the macro cell and the time frequency of the PSS/SSS of the small cell The resources are aligned, and the interference strength measured by the macro UE includes the synchronization signal power of the small cell, and if the two frequencies are different or the field boundaries are not aligned, the PSS/SSS occupied by the macro cell may correspond to a small RE.
  • the method allows the small cell to have a downlink signal transmission on the RE corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the macro cell (since the PSS/SSS is transmitted on the center 6 RBs of the system bandwidth, so RB can also be said), for example, the small cell can be in the macro
  • the downlink data is transmitted on the 6 RBs corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the cell (which can be achieved by corresponding scheduling), or the second downlink synchronization signal (which is different from the downlink synchronization signal transmitted according to the system default configuration).
  • the macro cell and the small cell can coordinate with the small cell to learn the B corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the macro cell.
  • Such coordination can be performed through the X2 interface, the S1 interface, or through the OAM or even the UE (not limited to the UE that needs to perform small cell discovery). ) get on.
  • the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message.
  • the configuration information of the SS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the SS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell is small through the X2 message.
  • the cell recommendation (small cell) configuration information of the SS after receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own SS to complete the coordination between the cells. Conversely, the small cell can also indicate the configuration of its SS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setup flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message. The macro cell then configures the corresponding SS measurement for the UE through the air interface.
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes: the macro base station transmits the configuration of the SS or the configuration of the recommended SS to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW), and/or, The small base station transmits the configuration of the SS or the configuration of the recommended SS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW).
  • the configuration method includes: the network management system indicates the SS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the SS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the SS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the SS configuration information of the macro cell to the small base station.
  • the specific mode of transmitting the macro between the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the SS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell and then small
  • the SS configuration information of the cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the SS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station.
  • the manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.
  • Step 602 The UE receives measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station.
  • the macro base station first performs measurement configuration for the macro UE, and includes configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information) of the SS in the measurement configuration information, and the measurement configuration information further includes a threshold parameter (threshold for controlling whether to start measurement on the non-serving cell) ).
  • the measurement configuration information may also include parameter information k for filtering the measured values.
  • the macro UE receives a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration) of the macro base station, which includes the above measurement configuration information.
  • Step 603 The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the SS according to the measurement configuration information.
  • the macro UE measures the received signal strength on the resource unit corresponding to the downlink synchronization signal of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell) (including the primary synchronization signal PSS and the secondary synchronization signal SSS, or only one of them) (or the interference measurement resource) (
  • the synchronization signal - received signal strength indicator abbreviated as SS-RSSI
  • the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the total received power on the RE corresponding to the SS over the measured bandwidth, and the received signal of the synchronization signal of the serving cell is measured.
  • the SS-RSSI' is the interference strength measured by the macro UE, that is, the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, and may include signal power from adjacent small cells, and signal power from neighboring macro cells.
  • the UE performs L3 (Layer 3) filtering on the SS-RSSI measured by the physical layer, and also filters SS-RSSI and SSRP separately, and then calculates the SS-RSSI by using the filtered value.
  • L3 Layer 3 filtering
  • Step 604 The UE determines, according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, execute step 605; otherwise, end the processing process.
  • the macro UE controls the measurement of the non-serving cell. Specifically, if (or SS-SSr>threshold is also possible), then the macro UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell), otherwise the macro UE may not measure the non-serving cell or the small cell of the same frequency and different frequency (may be other a non-serving cell of a standard, or a small cell).
  • the measured SS-RSSI' may be lower than threshold, so measurement of non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be initiated (small cell measurement configuration may be non-serving)
  • the measurement configuration of the cell is the same or different); and if the macro UE1 and the macro UE2 are close to picol and pico2, respectively, the measured SS-RSSI' will be relatively more due to the power of the PSS/SSS including the pico (that is, the interference strength). High, and as they are close to picol and pico2, they tend to increase.
  • UE1 and UE2 each initiate a non-serving cell (or small cell). Measure, thereby discovering and identifying non-serving cells or small cells (ie, picol or pico2 in the figure) through cell search.
  • the above measurement based on SS-RSSI' reflects the interference strength, that is, the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, considering that the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell (usually switched) is generally used for decision making in radio resource management.
  • SSRQ synchronization signal received quality
  • SSRP synchronization signal received power
  • the measurement on the RE corresponding to the power PSS/SSS is based on the linear average of the power contribution of the synchronization signal on the RE corresponding to the SS on the measured bandwidth.
  • This value reflects The ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength (the signal strength of the non-serving cell), therefore, can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell, and can also reflect whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell based on the measurement of the SSRQ defined above. For example, when the SSRQ is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell or the small cell.
  • the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • this method it is also possible to consider the increment of the measured value as one of the discriminating conditions for starting the same-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called the incremental decision method.
  • Incremental (variation) according to SS-RSSI' or SSRQ within a certain time:
  • the measured SS-RSSI' increase means that the non-serving cell signal (or interference) strength is enhanced, if SS-RSSI' continues to increase, it may be explained Closer to another cell, you can consider starting the measurement; or, the reduction of SSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the signal strength of the serving cell decreases. If the SSRQ continues to decrease, it may indicate that it is farther away from the serving cell. , and getting closer and closer to the neighboring cell, you can consider starting the measurement.
  • the incremental decision method and the strength decision method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.
  • the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone.
  • the small cell discovery can be performed in the non-serving cell measurement, and the measurement of the non-serving cell needs not only the needs of small cell discovery but also the UE between macro cells.
  • the need for mobility eg, handover
  • the SS-RSSI' or SSRQ measurement is combined with at least two of the RSRP (CRS-based) or SSRP measurements to control the pair.
  • Measurement of co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cells (adjacent cells).
  • mode 1 if SS-RSSr>threshold, or RSRP is smaller than a threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of a non-serving cell;
  • mode 2 when SS-RSSF>thresliold, or SSRP is less than a certain threshold (possibly by base station (Configuration), initiate measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 3 If SSRQ ⁇ thresholdl, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 4 If SS Q ⁇ thresholdl, or SSRP is smaller than some A threshold (possibly configured by the base station) initiates measurements on non-serving cells.
  • the start of the measurement is only for small cell discovery, you can also measure SS-RSSI' or, SSRQ with, RSRP (CRS-based) or, At least two of the SSRP measurements are combined to control the measurement of the small cell.
  • the example changes the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four modes to the "and" relationship.
  • the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied.
  • the specific examples are as follows: First or default, the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined one.
  • the joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (such as SS-RSSI' or SSRQ measurement).
  • a new measurement such as SS-RSSI' or SSRQ measurement.
  • UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control.
  • the base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including Radio Resource Control (C) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).
  • C Radio Resource Control
  • MAC layer control element control element MAC layer control element control element
  • abbreviation downlink control information
  • Step 605 The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the serving base station has configured the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the specific condition of the UE.
  • the method can be started.
  • the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (for example, a strong interference indication) after determining that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, and the base station performs the measurement according to the measurement result or the specific indication received.
  • the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect the small cell in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) by switching/diverting to the small cell or using the small cell as the secondary carrier, reducing the load of the macro cell. .
  • Step 701 Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.
  • the macro cell can pass the X2 Setu process message, ENB Configuration
  • the update process message, or the X2 message such as the Load Information message indicates the configuration information of the CRS of the macro cell to the small cell (the macro cell can also be carried in the handover preparation flow message)
  • the RRC information between the base stations, for example, AS-Config notifies the configuration information of the CRS of the macro cell to the small cell, or the macro cell recommends the configuration information of the CRS (small cell) to the small cell through the X2 message, and the small cell receives the configuration information.
  • the small cell can also indicate the configuration of the CRS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through the X2 Setu flow message, the ENB Configuration Update flow message, or the X2 message such as the Load Information message.
  • the macro cell then configures the corresponding CRS measurement for the UE through the air interface.
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes: the macro base station transmits the CRS configuration or the recommended CRS configuration to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW), and/or The small base station transmits the configuration of the CRS or the configuration of the recommended CRS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (for example, HeNB GW, S 1 GW ).
  • the gateway eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW
  • the small base station transmits the configuration of the CRS or the configuration of the recommended CRS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (for example, HeNB GW, S 1 GW ).
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates the CRS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the CRS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the CRS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the macro cell to the small base station. CRS configuration information.
  • the specific mode of transmitting the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the CRS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell and then small
  • the CRS configuration information that is configured by the cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the CRS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station.
  • the manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.
  • the interference strength measured by the macro UE includes the CRS signal power of the small cell, and if the two are not aligned, the macro cell
  • the RE of the CRS may correspond to other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the small cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by the load (even A small cell may also be found when the small cell is under low load or no load.
  • the small cell has a downlink signal on the RE corresponding to the CRS of the macro cell, for example, the small cell may be in the CRS with the macro cell.
  • the downlink data (which can be reached by the corresponding scheduling) or the dummy data (dummy) is transmitted on the corresponding RE.
  • the data is normally sent, otherwise the dummy RE is sent; or
  • the pico always transmits a dummy RE at the RE position corresponding to the macro cell CRS, and the data can be normally transmitted on the RE of the dummy RE.
  • a second CRS signal (unlike the CRS transmitted according to the system default configuration).
  • the macro cell and the small cell can coordinate the configuration of the CRS corresponding to the macro cell by the small cell, including the physical cell ID (PCI), the number of ports (or port number), and the measurement bandwidth (for example, the center frequency of the measurement bandwidth and the RB). Number))
  • PCI physical cell ID
  • the number of ports or port number
  • the measurement bandwidth for example, the center frequency of the measurement bandwidth and the RB. Number
  • Step 702 The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.
  • the measurement configuration information includes: CRS configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information); the CRS configuration information may include subframe configuration information, CRS frequency domain offset, or corresponding to a CRS frequency domain offset
  • the physical cell identifier (PCI, Physical Cell Identity) the configuration information of the CRS may also include the port number or port number.
  • the measurement configuration information may further include: a threshold parameter for controlling whether to start measurement on the non-serving cell, and parameter information k for filtering the measurement value.
  • the macro base station configures the CRS measurement of the macro UE not only to measure the default bandwidth, but also the macro base station can configure the bandwidth of the interference strength measurement.
  • the configuration can be expressed by the following method, for example, measuring the center frequency + bandwidth (the number of RBs). RB start index and end index, RB start index and RB number, and so on. In this way, even if the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies (that is, the center frequency points of the two are different), as long as the spectrum of the macro cell and the small cell overlap, the macro UE can be determined by measurement on the overlapping bandwidth. Close to the small cell of the different frequency, thereby starting the measurement of the small cell with different frequency.
  • the receiving, by the UE, the measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station may be: receiving, by the UE, the measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration) Step 703: The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the CRS according to the measurement configuration information.
  • RRCConnectionReconfiguration radio link reconfiguration message
  • the macro UE measures the received signal strength (CRS - received signal strength indicator) on the resource unit corresponding to the cell level reference signal CRS (or interference measurement resource) of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell).
  • CRS received signal strength indicator
  • CRS-RSSI the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the total received power on the RE corresponding to the CRS on the measured bandwidth), and the received signal power RSRP of the CRS of the serving cell is measured (the measurement of the physical layer is Based on the linear average of the power contribution of the CRS on the RE corresponding to the CRS on the measured bandwidth, the difference between the two (CRS-RSSI minus RSRP, referred to as CRS-RSSI') is the non-serving cell measured by the macro UE.
  • the received signal strength may include signal power from neighboring small cells, as well as signal power from neighboring macro cells.
  • the UE performs L3 (layer 3) filtering on the CRS-RSSI' measured by the physical layer, and may also filter the CRS-RSSI and the RSRP separately, and then calculate the CRS-RSSI' by using the filtered value.
  • Step 704 The UE determines, according to the interference strength measured on the CRS RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, execute step 705; otherwise, end the processing flow.
  • the macro UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell), otherwise the macro UE may not measure the same frequency and different A non-serving cell or a small cell (which may also be a non-serving cell of another standard, or a small cell).
  • the measured CRS-RSSI' may be lower than the threshold, so the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be initiated (the measurement configuration of the small cell may be related to the non-serving cell)
  • the measurement configuration is the same or different; and if macro UE1 and macro UE2 are close to picol and ico2 respectively, the measured CRS-RSSI' will be relatively high due to the power of the CRS including the pico (that is, the interference strength), and With their respective Close to picol and pico2, it tends to increase.
  • UE1 and UE2 When their respective measured CRS-RSSI' is greater than threshold, UE1 and UE2 each initiate measurement of non-serving cells (or small cells), so that they can be found through cell search. And identify the non-serving cell or small cell (ie picol or pico2 in the figure).
  • RSRQ RSRP/CRS-SSF
  • the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell based on the measurement of the RSRQ defined above. For example, when the RSRQ is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell or the small cell.
  • the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • the increment of the measured value is one of the discriminating conditions for starting the same-frequency/inter-frequency measurement.
  • This method is called the incremental decision method.
  • the increment in a certain time: the measured CRS-RSSI' increase means that the strength of the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced, and if the CRS-RSSI' is continuously enhanced, it may indicate the distance from another A cell is getting closer and closer, and you can consider starting measurements.
  • the incremental decision method and the strength decision method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.
  • the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone.
  • the small cell discovery can be performed in the non-serving cell measurement, and the measurement of the non-serving cell needs not only the needs of small cell discovery but also the UE between macro cells.
  • Measurement of co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cells are combined to control the pair.
  • mode 1 If CRS-RSSr>threshoW, or RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 2 When CRS-RSSI,>threshold, Or the CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, and starts the measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 3 If the RSRQ, ⁇ threshold1, or RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, the measurement of the non-serving cell is started; If the RSRQ, ⁇ threshold1, or CSI-RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, the measurement of the non-serving cell is initiated.
  • CRS-RSSI, RSRQ, RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, CSI-RSRP measurements can also be combined to control the measurement of small cells.
  • CRS-RSSI, RSRQ, RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, CSI-RSRP measurements can also be combined to control the measurement of small cells.
  • the specific example will be the above.
  • the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the four ways is changed to the "and” relationship.
  • the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied.
  • the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined or
  • the joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (for example, CRS-RSSI, or RSRQ).
  • a new measurement for example, CRS-RSSI, or RSRQ.
  • UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control.
  • the base station may also implicitly indicate, by means of signaling, that the UE performs joint determination criteria, including a Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, a MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviated as DCI).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • DCI downlink control information
  • Step 705 The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the method for specifically starting the measurement of the non-serving cell (or the small cell) is as follows: In the first mode, the serving base station has configured the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to specifically The determination of the condition can be started. In the second manner, the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (for example, a strong interference indication) after determining that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, and the base station according to the measurement result or the specific indication received. The measurement configuration (and/or the start of the measurement) of the non-serving cell (or small cell) is performed.
  • a specific indication for example, a strong interference indication
  • the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect the small cell in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) by switching/diverting to the small cell or using the small cell as the secondary carrier, reducing the macro size.
  • the load of the area Embodiment 6
  • Step 801 Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.
  • the interference strength measured by the macro UE includes the CSI-RS signal power of the small cell, and if the two are not Alignment, the CSI-RS occupied by the macro cell may correspond to other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the small cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by the load (even in the small cell)
  • a small cell may also be found when the load is loaded or not, and the small cell is preferably sent by a downlink signal on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS of the macro cell.
  • the small cell may be in the CSI-RS with the macro cell.
  • the corresponding RE transmits downlink data (which can be reached by corresponding scheduling) or dummy data (dummy RE).
  • the macro cell and the small cell can coordinate the small cell to learn the CSI-RS and the measurement related configuration of the macro cell, including the CSI-RS subframe configuration information, and measure the bandwidth (for example, the center frequency and the RB number of the measurement bandwidth).
  • Such coordination may be performed through an X2/S1 interface (eg, through an X2 setup procedure or an eNB configuration update procedure or other X2/S1 signaling procedure) or a network management system or even a UE (not limited to UEs requiring small cell discovery).
  • the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message.
  • the configuration information of the CSI-RS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the CSI-RS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell passes the above
  • the X2 message recommends the configuration information of the non-zero-power CSI-RS to the small cell (small cell).
  • the small cell After receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own non-zero-power CSI-RS to complete the inter-cell coordination. .
  • small cells can also pass X2 Setup flow messages, ENB Configuration Update process messages, or Load Information messages, etc.
  • X2 messages directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, The X2 proxy indicates the configuration of the non-zero power CSI-RS to the macro cell, and the macro cell then configures the corresponding CSI-RS measurement for the UE through the air interface.
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes: the macro base station transmits the CSI-RS configuration or the recommended non-zero power CSI-RS to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW).
  • the configuration, and/or, the small base station transmits the configuration of the non-zero power CSI-RS or the configuration of the recommended macro base station CSI-RS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW).
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates the CSI-RS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the non-zero power CSI-RS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the non-zero power of the small cell to the macro base station.
  • the CSI-RS configuration information is used to send CSI-RS configuration information of the macro cell to the small base station.
  • the specific mode of transmitting the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the CSI-RS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or after the small cell switches to the macro cell, The non-zero-power CSI-RS configuration information configured by the small cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including non-zero-power CSI-RS configuration information, by the UE. Reported to the macro base station.
  • the performance of small cell discovery can also be improved through a large-scale coordination, for example, aligning REs corresponding to CSI-RSs of multiple macro cells (constituting a coordinated discovery area) (macro).
  • the small-area may transmit CSI-RS configuration information through an X2/S1 interface or a network management system.
  • the serving macro base station may also configure CSI-RS information of the neighboring macro base station for the UE, so that the UE will include the service when measuring the interference strength.
  • the signal power of the macro base station and the adjacent macro base station are all reduced, so that the interference strength only reflects the power strength of the small cell, which can improve the accuracy of starting small cell measurement.
  • Step 802 The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.
  • the measurement configuration information includes first downlink signal configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information), where the first downlink signal is a non-zero power CSI-RS, and the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal includes: Zero-power CSI-RS resource configuration identifier (, resource configuration information (res. urceC.nfig), subframe configuration information (frameConfig), antenna port number (antennaPortsCount), scrambling identity (scramblingldentity), quasi-co-location information with CRS (qcl-CRS-Info).
  • the measurement configuration information further includes a start measurement threshold (threshold) for controlling whether to initiate measurement of the non-serving cell, and/or parameter information k for filtering the measured value.
  • the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station may be: the macro base station sends the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration).
  • RRCConnectionReconfiguration a radio link reconfiguration message
  • Step 803 The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS according to the measurement configuration information.
  • the macro UE measures the resource unit corresponding to the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS (or the interference measurement resource) of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell) (the measurement configuration information of the CSI-RS sent by the macro base station of the serving cell received by the UE) CSI-RS - received signal strength indicator (CSI-RSSI), the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the total received power on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • SI CSI-RS - received signal strength indicator
  • the difference between the two is the interference strength measured by the macro UE, that is, the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, and may include signals from adjacent small cells. Power, and signal power from neighboring macro cells.
  • the UE performs L3 (layer 3) filtering on the CSI-RSSI' measured by the physical layer, or filters the CSI-RSSI and CSI-RSRP reported by the physical layer to L3, and calculates the CSI-RSSI by using the filtered value.
  • the macro base station can also configure the measurement bandwidth for the measurement of the UE, and is not limited to the measurement on the center 6 RBs of the system bandwidth, but can be as needed (for example, measuring the macro cell and the small cell spectrum)
  • the overlapping part is configured to measure the bandwidth, which can support not only the scenario where the macro cell and the small cell are at the same frequency, but also the scenario where the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies but the spectrum partially overlaps.
  • Step 804 The UE determines whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell based on the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE. If yes, perform step 805; otherwise, end the processing flow.
  • the macro UE initiates measurements on (same frequency and/or inter-frequency) neighboring cells or small cells, otherwise the macro UE may not measure neighboring cells or small Community.
  • the above measurement based on CSI-RSSI' reflects the interference strength or the received signal strength of the non-serving cell.
  • the channel state information reference signal reception quality may be defined as the channel state information reference signal received power (CSI-RSRP, and the physical layer measurement is based on the CSI-RS on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth.
  • the linear average of the power contributions is the ratio of the interference intensity CSI-RSSI'. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength.
  • the UE can reflect whether the UE is far away from the serving macro cell, and can also reflect whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the measurement of the CSI-RSRQ defined above.
  • the CSI-RSRQ is lower than (or less than or equal to) the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell.
  • the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • this method it is also conceivable to use the increment of the measured value as the discriminating condition for starting the same-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called the incremental decision method.
  • the measured CSI-RSSI' increase means that the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) strength is enhanced, if the CSI-RSSI' continues to increase, it may indicate the distance Another cell is getting closer and closer, and it is considered to initiate measurement; or, the decrease of CSI-RSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the signal strength of the serving cell decreases. If the CSI-RSRQ continues to decrease, it may indicate that the distance from the serving cell is more The farther it is, and the closer it is to the neighboring cell, the start of the measurement can be considered.
  • the incremental decision method and the strength decision method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.
  • the measurement of the non-serving cell needs to consider not only the needs of small cell discovery, but also the need for UE mobility (such as handover) between macro cells.
  • the joint decision criterion includes: combining CSI-RSSr or CSI-RSRQ with at least two of RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ or CSI-RSRP-based measurements to control a co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell (phase) Measurement of neighboring cells). For example, mode 1: if CSI-RSSI, >threshold, or RSRP is smaller than a threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of a non-serving cell; mode 2: when CSI-SSI'>threshold, or CSI-RSRP is smaller than a certain base station The configured threshold is used to initiate measurement on the non-serving cell.
  • Mode 3 If CSI-RSRQ ⁇ threshold1, or RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 4: If CSI-SQ ⁇ thresholdl, Or the CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, and the measurement of the non-serving cell is started. If the initiation of the measurement is only for small cell discovery, at least two of CSI-RSSI, CSI-RSRQ, RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP may be combined to control measurement of the small cell, specifically The example changes the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four ways to the "and" relationship.
  • the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied.
  • the specific examples are as follows: First or default, the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined or When the base station configures the threshold, the joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (for example, CSI-RSSI' or CSI-RSRQ measurement).
  • UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control.
  • the base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including adio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).
  • RRC resource Control
  • Step 805 The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the serving base station has configured the measurement of the neighboring cell (or the small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to determine the specific condition to start; the second mode, after the UE determines that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, The serving base station reports the measurement result or sends a specific indication (for example, a strong interference indication), and the base station performs measurement configuration (and/or measurement start) of the neighboring cell (or small cell) according to the measurement result or a specific indication (for example, a strong interference indication). ).
  • a specific indication for example, a strong interference indication
  • the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect small cells in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) by switching/diverting to small cells or using small cells as secondary carriers, reducing the load of macro cells. .
  • Step 901 Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell. (This step is optional.)
  • the macro cell and the small cell coexist, if the macro cell and the small cell have the same frequency (the same center frequency point) and the field boundaries are aligned, the PSS/SSS of the macro cell and the PSS of the small cell/ The time-frequency resources of the SSS are aligned, and the interference strength measured by the macro UE includes the synchronization signal power of the small cell, and if the two frequencies are different or the frame boundaries are not aligned, the PSS/SSS of the macro cell may occupy the RE.
  • the small cell Corresponding to other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the small cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by its load (even when the small cell is under low load or no load, the small cell can be found), In a certain way, the small cell has a downlink signal (such as a small cell) on the RE corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the macro cell (since the PSS/SSS is transmitted on the center 6 RBs of the system bandwidth, so RB can also be said).
  • a downlink signal such as a small cell
  • the downlink data may be transmitted on 6 RBs corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the macro cell (which may be achieved by corresponding scheduling), or may also transmit the second downlink synchronization signal (different from the default according to the system) Set the downlink synchronization signal transmitted).
  • the small cell can be informed of the RB corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the macro cell, and the coordination can be performed through the X2 interface, the S1 interface, or through the OAM or even the UE (not limited to the UE that needs to perform small cell discovery). ) get on.
  • the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message.
  • the configuration information of the SS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the SS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell is small through the X2 message.
  • the cell recommendation (small cell) configuration information of the SS after receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own SS to complete the coordination between the cells. Conversely, the small cell can also indicate the configuration of its SS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setup flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message. The macro cell then configures the corresponding SS measurement for the UE through the air interface.
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes: the macro base station transmits the configuration of the SS or the configuration of the recommended SS to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW), and/or, The small base station transmits the configuration of the SS or the configuration of the recommended SS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW).
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates the SS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the SS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the SS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the macro cell to the small base station.
  • SS configuration information includes: the network management system indicates the SS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the SS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the SS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the macro cell to the small base station.
  • the specific mode of transmitting the macro between the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the SS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell and then small
  • the SS configuration information of the cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the SS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station.
  • the manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.
  • Step 902 The UE receives measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station.
  • the macro base station first performs measurement configuration for the macro UE, and optionally includes configuration information of the SS (interference measurement resource configuration information) in the measurement configuration information. Measurement configuration information is also included to control whether Start the threshold parameter (threshold) for measuring the non-serving cell.
  • the measurement configuration information may also include parameter information k for filtering the measured values.
  • the macro UE receives a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration) of the macro base station, which includes the above measurement configuration information.
  • Step 903 The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the SS (or the interference measurement resource) according to the measurement configuration information.
  • the macro UE measures the downlink synchronization signal of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell) (including the primary synchronization signal PSS and the secondary synchronization signal SSS, and may also measure only one of the resource elements).
  • the received signal strength, wherein the measured received signal is the residual signal after the downlink signal of the serving cell is cancelled.
  • the UE first performs interference cancellation on the signal received at the synchronization signal resource location based on the primary synchronization and secondary synchronization sequences of the serving cell (using the interference cancellation receiver IC receiver), and then measures the strength of the remaining signals ( Interference recorded synchronization signal - received signal strength indicator, abbreviated as ICSS-RSSI, the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the total received power of the residual signal after IC cancellation on the RE corresponding to the SS over the measured bandwidth.
  • the macro UE measures the interference strength, i.e., the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, possibly including the signal power from the neighboring small cells, and the signal power from the neighboring macro cells.
  • the UE performs L3 (Layer 3) filtering on the ICSS-RSSI measured by the physical layer.
  • the measurement result is the old (previous) filtered measurement result.
  • Step 904 The UE determines, according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, execute step 905; otherwise, end the processing process.
  • the measured ICSS-RSSI may be lower than the threshold, so the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be initiated (the measurement configuration of the small cell may be related to the non-serving cell)
  • the measurement configuration is the same or different); and if macro UE1 and macro UE2 are close to ico and ico2 respectively, the measured ICSS-RSSI will be relatively high due to the power of the PSS/SSS including the pico (ie, the interference strength). And as they are close to picol and pico2, they tend to increase.
  • UE1 and UE2 each initiate measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell).
  • Non-serving cells or small cells ie picol or pico2 are discovered and identified by cell search.
  • the above ICSS-RSSI-based measurement reflects the interference strength, that is, the received signal strength of the non-serving cell.
  • SSRQ synchronization signal received quality
  • SSRP synchronization signal received power
  • the measurement on the RE corresponding to the PSS/SSS is based on the linear average of the power contribution of the synchronization signal on the RE corresponding to the SS on the measured bandwidth.
  • This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength (signal strength of the non-serving cell). Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the neighboring cell or the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell based on the measurement of the SSRQ defined above. For example, when the SSRQ is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell or the small cell.
  • the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone, and small cell discovery can be performed in non-serving cell measurement, while the measurement of non-serving cells needs to consider not only the needs of small cell discovery but also the UE between macro cells.
  • the need for mobility (such as handover), for which you can use joint decision criteria, ie, ICSS-RSSI or, SSRQ measurements, and RSRP (CRS-based) Or, RSRQ, SSRP measurements jointly control the measurement of co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cells (adjacent cells or small cells).
  • Mode 1 If ICSS-RSSI>threshold, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, initiate measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 2 When ICSS-RSSI>threshold, or SSRP is less than a certain threshold (possibly by base station (Configuration), initiate measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 3 If SSRQ ⁇ thresholdl, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 4 If SSRQ ⁇ thresholdl, or SSRP is smaller than a certain Threshold (possibly configured by the base station) to initiate measurements on non-serving cells.
  • the measurement of ICSS-RSSI or SSRQ may be combined with the measurement of RS P (CRS based) or RSRQ, SSRP to control the measurement of small cells, specifically For example, it is sufficient to change the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four ways to the "and" relationship.
  • the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied.
  • the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined or
  • the joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (such as the measurement of ICSS-RSSI or SSRQ).
  • UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control.
  • the base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC layer control element control element MAC layer control element control element
  • abbreviation downlink control information
  • the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • This method is called an incremental decision method.
  • the measured ICSS-RSSI or SSRQ increment in a certain period of time the measured ICSS-RSSI increase means that the strength of the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced. If the ICSS-RSSI continues to increase, it may indicate that the distance from another cell is coming. The closer you are, the more you can start measuring.
  • the incremental decision method and the strength determination method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement. Step 905: The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the monthly service base station has configured the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to The determination of the specific condition can be started.
  • the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (for example, a strong interference indication), and the base station determines the specific result according to the measurement result or the received Indicates the measurement configuration (and/or the start of the measurement) of the non-serving cell (or small cell).
  • a specific indication for example, a strong interference indication
  • the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect the small cell in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) by switching/diverting to the small cell or using the small cell as the secondary carrier, reducing the load of the macro cell. .
  • Example VIII Example VIII.
  • Step 1001 Resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.
  • the interference strength measured by the macro UE will include the CRS signal power of the small cell, and if the two are not aligned, the macro cell
  • the RE of the CRS may correspond to other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the small cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by the load (even when the small cell is under load or no load) Small cell), preferably, the small cell has a downlink signal on the RE corresponding to the CRS of the macro cell, for example, the RE corresponding to the CRS of the macro cell of the macro cell (measured by the macro UE)
  • the downlink data is transmitted (either by corresponding scheduling), or the second CRS signal (which is different from the CRS transmitted according to the system default configuration).
  • the macro cell and the small cell can coordinate the configuration of the CRS corresponding to the macro cell by the small cell, including the physical cell ID (PCI), the number of ports (or port number), and the measurement bandwidth (for example, the center frequency of the measurement bandwidth and the RB).
  • the number of resources between the Macro Cell and the small cell can be performed through the X2 interface, the S1 interface, the network management (OAM), or even the UE (not limited to the UE that needs to perform small cell discovery).
  • the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message.
  • the configuration information of the CRS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the CRS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell is small through the X2 message.
  • the CRS configuration information of the cell recommendation (small cell) after receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own CRS to complete the coordination between the cells.
  • the small cell can also indicate the configuration of its CRS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message.
  • the macro cell then configures the corresponding CRS measurement for the UE through the air interface.
  • a method for coordinating inter-cell configuration through an S1 interface or other interfaces includes: a macro base station through an MME and/or a gateway
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates the CRS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the CRS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the CRS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the macro cell to the small base station. CRS configuration information.
  • the specific mode of transmitting the macro between the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the CRS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell and then small
  • the CRS configuration information configured by the cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the CRS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station.
  • the manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.
  • Step 1002 The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.
  • the measurement configuration information includes: CRS configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information); the CRS configuration information may include subframe configuration information, CRS frequency domain offset, or The physical cell identifier (PCI, Physical Cell Identity) corresponding to the CRS frequency domain offset,
  • CRS configuration information interference measurement resource configuration information
  • the CRS configuration information may include subframe configuration information, CRS frequency domain offset, or The physical cell identifier (PCI, Physical Cell Identity) corresponding to the CRS frequency domain offset
  • the configuration information of the CRS may also include the port number or port number.
  • the measurement configuration information may further include: a threshold parameter (control) for controlling whether to start measurement on the non-serving cell, and parameter information k for filtering the measurement value.
  • a threshold parameter control
  • parameter information k for filtering the measurement value.
  • the macro base station configures the CRS measurement of the macro UE not only to measure the default bandwidth, but also the macro base station can configure the bandwidth of the interference strength measurement.
  • the configuration can be expressed by the following method, for example, measuring the center frequency + bandwidth (the number of RBs). RB start index and end index, RB start index and RB number, and so on. In this way, even if the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies (that is, the center frequency points of the two are different), as long as the spectrum of the macro cell and the small cell overlap, the macro UE can be determined by measurement on the overlapping bandwidth. Close to the small cell of the different frequency, thereby starting the measurement of the small cell with different frequency.
  • the receiving, by the UE, the measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station may be: receiving, by the UE, measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRC Connection Reconfiguration).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration a radio link reconfiguration message
  • Step 1003 The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the CRS (or the interference measurement resource) according to the measurement configuration information.
  • the macro UE measures the received signal strength on the resource unit corresponding to the cell level reference signal CRS of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell), where the measured received signal is used to eliminate the serving cell. Remaining signal after CRS.
  • the UE first performs interference cancellation based on the CRS sequence of the serving cell for the signal received on the CRS RE (using the interference cancellation receiver IC receiver), and then measures the strength of the remaining signal (Interference cancelled CRS - received signal).
  • the strength indicator abbreviated as IC-CRS-RSSI, is based on the linear average of the total received power of the residual signal after interference cancellation on the CRS corresponding to the CRS on the measured bandwidth.
  • the macro UE measures the interference strength, i.e., the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, possibly including the signal power from the adjacent small cell, and the signal power from the adjacent macro cell.
  • Step 1004 The UE determines, according to the interference strength measured on the CRS RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, execute step 1005; otherwise, end the processing flow.
  • the macro UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell), otherwise the macro UE may not measure the same frequency.
  • a non-serving cell or a small cell of an inter-frequency may also be a non-serving cell of another standard, or a small cell).
  • the measured IC-CRS-RSSI may be lower than the threshold, so the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be initiated (the measurement configuration of the small cell may be non-serving)
  • the measurement configuration of the cell is the same or different; and if macro UE1 and macro UE2 are close to picol and pico2 respectively, the measured IC-CRS-RSSI will be relatively high due to the power of the CRS including the pico (that is, the interference strength). And as they are close to picol and pico2, they tend to increase.
  • UE1 and UE2 each initiate a non-serving cell (or small cell). Measured to discover and identify non-serving cells or small cells (ie picol or pico2) by cell search.
  • RSRQ RSRP/IC-CRS-RSSI, where RSRQ is the newly defined reference signal reception quality.
  • This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength (the signal strength of the non-serving cell). Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell.
  • the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell based on the measurement of the RSRQ' defined above. For example, when the RSRQ' is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell or the small cell.
  • a joint decision criterion that is, measurement of IC-CRS-RSSIZP-CSI-RSSI or RSRQ'CSI-RSRQ, RSRP ( CRS-based, RSRQ, or CSI-RSRP-based measurements jointly control the measurement of co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cells (adjacent cells).
  • mode 1 if the IC-CRS-SSI ZP-CSI-RSSI>threshold, or the RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, initiate measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • mode 2 when IC-CRS-RSSI ZP-CSI- SSI>threshold, or CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, and starts measurement of the non-serving cell;
  • Mode 3 If RSRQ, CSI-RS Q ⁇ thresholdl, or RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start the right Measurement of the serving cell;
  • Mode 4 If the RSRQ, CSI-SQ ⁇ threshold1, or CSI-RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, the measurement of the non-serving cell is initiated.
  • the measurement of IC-CRS-RSSIZP-CRS-RSSI or RSRQ'RSRQ* can also be combined with RSRP (CRS-based) or based, or CSI-RSRP-based measurements.
  • RSRP CRS-based
  • CSI-RSRP-based measurements For the measurement of the small cell, specifically, the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four methods is changed to the "and" relationship.
  • the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied.
  • the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined or
  • a joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (for example, measurement of IC-CRS-RSSI or RSRQ).
  • UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control.
  • the base station may also implicitly indicate to the UE to perform joint determination criteria by signaling, including the Radio Resource ControK RRC layer IE, the MAC layer control element control element, and the downlink control information (abbreviated as DCI). ).
  • the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • This method is called an incremental decision method. Incremental over a certain period of time based on IC-CRS-RSSI: IC-CRS-RSSI measured The increase means that the strength of the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced. If the IC-CRS-RSSI continues to increase, it may indicate that it is getting closer and closer to another cell, and it may be considered to start measurement and the like.
  • the incremental decision method and the strength determination method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.
  • Step 1005 The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the method for specifically starting the measurement on the neighboring cell (or the small cell) is as follows:
  • the serving base station has configured the measurement of the neighboring cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to specifically The determination of the condition can be started.
  • the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (such as a strong interference indication) after determining that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, and the base station according to the measurement result or a specific indication (for example, strong) Interference indication) Perform measurement configuration (and/or start of measurement) of a neighboring cell (or small cell).
  • a specific indication such as a strong interference indication
  • the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect small cells in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) and reduce the load of the macro cell by switching/diverting to small cells or using small cells as secondary carriers. .
  • Example IX Example IX.
  • Step 1101 Resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.
  • the interference strength measured by the macro UE includes the CSI-RS signal power of the small cell, and if the two are not Alignment, the CSI-RS occupied by the macro cell may correspond to other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the small cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by the load (even in the small cell)
  • a small cell may also be found when the load is loaded or not, and the small cell is preferably sent by a downlink signal on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS of the macro cell.
  • the small cell may be in the CSI-RS with the macro cell.
  • the corresponding RE transmits downlink data (which can be reached by corresponding scheduling) or dummy data (dummy RE).
  • the interface is performed (for example, by an X2 setup procedure or an eNB configuration update procedure or other X2/S1 signaling procedure) or by a network management system or even a UE (not limited to a UE requiring small cell discovery).
  • the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message.
  • the configuration information of the CSI-RS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the CSI-RS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell passes the above
  • the X2 message recommends the configuration information of the non-zero-power CSI-RS to the small cell (small cell).
  • the small cell After receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own non-zero-power CSI-RS to complete the inter-cell coordination. . Conversely, the small cell can also indicate its non-zero power CSI to the macro cell either directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setup flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message. - The configuration of the RS, the macro cell then configures the corresponding CSI-RS measurement for the UE through the air interface.
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes the macro base station transmitting the CSI-RS configuration or recommending the non-zero power CSI to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW).
  • the configuration of the RS, and/or the small base station transmits the configuration of the non-zero power CSI-RS or the configuration of the recommended macro base station CSI-RS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW).
  • the method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates the CSI-RS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the non-zero power CSI-RS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the non-zero power of the small cell to the macro base station.
  • the CSI-RS configuration information is used to send CSI-RS configuration information of the macro cell to the small base station.
  • the specific mode of transmitting the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the CSI-RS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or after the small cell switches to the macro cell, Non-zero power CSI-RS configuration information previously configured by the small cell
  • the macro base station is configured to receive the system information of the small cell, including the non-zero power CSI-RS configuration information, and report the information to the macro base station.
  • the performance of small cell discovery can also be improved through a large-scale coordination, for example, aligning REs corresponding to CSI-RSs of multiple macro cells (constituting a coordinated discovery area) (macro).
  • the small-area may transmit CSI-RS configuration information through an X2/S1 interface or a network management system.
  • the serving macro base station may also configure CSI-RS information of the neighboring macro base station for the UE, so that the UE will include the service when measuring the interference strength.
  • the signal power of the macro base station and the adjacent macro base station are eliminated (or the zero-power CSI-S of other neighboring macro cells corresponding to the CSI-RS of the serving cell, so that the UE only needs to eliminate the CSI-RS signal of the serving cell. It is ok), so that the interference intensity only reflects the power intensity of the small cell, which can improve the accuracy of starting the small cell measurement.
  • Step 1102 The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.
  • the measurement configuration information includes measurement configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information) of the first downlink signal, where the first downlink signal is a non-zero power CSI-RS, and the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal includes : non-zero power CSI-RS resource configuration identifier (CSI-RS-Id tityNZP), resource configuration information (resourceConfig), subframe configuration information (frameConfig), antenna port number (antennaPortsCount), scrambling code identification (scramblingldentity), and CRS Quasi-co-location information (qcl-CRS-Info).
  • the measurement configuration information also includes a start measurement threshold (threshold) for controlling whether to initiate measurement for the non-serving cell, and/or parameter information k for filtering the measured value.
  • the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station may be: the macro base station sends the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration).
  • RRCConnectionReconfiguration a radio link reconfiguration message
  • the macro base station may also configure the measurement bandwidth for the measurement configuration of the UE, and is not limited to performing measurement on the center 6 RBs of the system bandwidth, but may perform measurement bandwidth according to requirements (for example, measuring a portion where the macro cell and the small cell spectrum overlap). Configuration, which can support not only the scenario where the macro cell and the small cell are at the same frequency, but also the scenario where the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies but the spectrum partially overlaps.
  • Step 1103 The UE measures a CSI-RS (or an interference measurement resource) according to the measurement configuration information. The interference strength on the corresponding RE.
  • the macro base station configures parameters for CSI-RSRP and CSI-RSSI measurement for the UE, including subframe configuration information of the CSI-RS.
  • the macro UE measures the resource unit corresponding to the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell) (indicated by the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station of the serving cell of the UE) The received signal strength, wherein the measured received signal is the residual signal after the CSI-RS of the serving cell is cancelled.
  • the UE first performs interference cancellation based on the CSI-RS sequence of the serving cell based on the signal received on the CSI-RS RE (using the interference cancellation receiver IC receiver), and then measures the strength of the remaining signals (Interference).
  • the received CSI-RS - received signal strength indicator abbreviated as IC-CSI-RSSI, is based on the total of the residual signals after interference cancellation on the CSI-RS on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth. Linear average of power).
  • the macro UE measures the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, possibly including the signal power from the adjacent small cell, and the signal power from the adjacent macro cell.
  • the UE performs L3 (Layer 3) filtering on the IC-CSI-RSSI measured by the physical layer.
  • Step 1104 The UE determines, according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, execute step 1105; otherwise, end the processing flow.
  • the macro UE initiates measurements on (co-frequency and/or inter-frequency) neighbor cells, otherwise the macro UE may not measure neighbor cells.
  • the above measurement based on IC-CSI-RSSI reflects the interference strength or the received signal strength of the non-serving cell.
  • CSI-RSRQ channel state information reference signal reception quality
  • CSI-RSRP channel state information reference signal reception power
  • physical layer measurement is based on CSI-RS on RE corresponding to CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth
  • Linear contribution of power contribution Mean The ratio of the interference intensity IC-CSI-RSSI. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength.
  • the UE can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the measurement of the CSI-RSRQ defined above.
  • the CSI-RSRQ is lower than (or less than or equal to) the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell.
  • the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method.
  • this method it is also conceivable to use the increment of the measured value as the discriminating condition for starting the same-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called the incremental decision method.
  • the measured increase in IC-CSI-SSI means that the strength of the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced, if the IC-CSI-RSSI continues to increase, It may be that the distance is closer and closer to another cell, and the measurement may be considered; or, the decrease of CSI-RSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the signal strength of the serving cell decreases. If the CSI-RSRQ continues to decrease, the distance may be indicated. The serving cell is getting farther and farther, and getting closer and closer to the neighboring cell, you can consider starting the measurement.
  • the incremental decision method and the strength decision method may also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.
  • the small cell discovery can be performed in the non-serving cell measurement, and the measurement of the non-serving cell not only needs to consider the needs of small cell discovery, but also needs to be considered in the macro.
  • the joint decision criterion includes: combining IC-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ with at least two of RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP to control a co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell (adjacent Measurement of the cell).
  • mode 1 if IC-CSI-RSSI>threshold, or RSRP is smaller than a threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of a non-serving cell
  • mode 2 when IC-CSI-SSI>threshold, or CSI-RSRP is smaller than a certain A threshold configured by a base station, starting measurement of a non-serving cell
  • mode 3 if CSI-RSRQ ⁇ thresholdl, or RSRP is smaller than a threshold configured by a certain base station, starting measurement of a non-serving cell
  • mode 4 if CSI-RSRQ ⁇ Threshold Or the CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, and the measurement of the non-serving cell is started.
  • IC-CSI-RSSI IC-CSI-RSSI
  • CSI-RSRQ CSI-RSRQ
  • RSRP CRS-based
  • RSRQ CSI-RSRP
  • the criterion of RSRP based on CRS is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is less than the pre-
  • a joint decision criterion is then performed to determine whether to initiate an intra-frequency or inter-frequency measurement by a new measurement, such as an IC-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ measurement.
  • UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control.
  • the base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • Step 1105 The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.
  • the method for specifically starting the measurement on the neighboring cell (or the small cell) is as follows:
  • the serving base station has configured the measurement of the neighboring cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to specifically The determination of the condition can be started.
  • the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (such as a strong interference indication) after determining that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, and the base station according to the measurement result or a specific indication (for example, strong) Interference indication) Perform measurement configuration (and/or start of measurement) of a neighboring cell (or small cell).
  • a specific indication such as a strong interference indication
  • the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect small cells in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) by switching/diverting to small cells or using small cells as secondary carriers, reducing the load of macro cells. .
  • the serving cell or the small cell can use not only the licensed frequency band (for example, the IMT frequency band) but also the unlicensed frequency band (for example, the frequency band that the wireless local area network WLAN can use), that is, the resource unit corresponding to the specified downlink signal by the UE.
  • the measurement of the received strength of the signal on (RE) can be performed in an unlicensed band.
  • the serving cell is an LTE cell (for example, LTE unlicensed band LTE-unlicensed is abbreviated as LTE-U cell)
  • the small cell may be a WLAN cell or other LTE-U cell; thus, the UE pairs the LTE-U cell.
  • the measurement of the received strength of the signal can determine whether there is a neighboring small cell (such as an LTE-U cell or a WLAN cell), and the signal strength of the adjacent small cell ( That is, the total signal strength of the neighboring cells, which can be used to initiate measurement of neighboring small cells, as well as selection of UE aggregated carriers, and activation and configuration of scells.
  • a neighboring small cell such as an LTE-U cell or a WLAN cell
  • the signal strength of the adjacent small cell That is, the total signal strength of the neighboring cells, which can be used to initiate measurement of neighboring small cells, as well as selection of UE aggregated carriers, and activation and configuration of scells.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are a method and device for controlling a user equipment (UE) to take measurements. The method comprises: a UE measuring jamming intensity on a resource element (RE) corresponding to a first downlink signal, and determining whether to start to measure a non-serving cell based on the jamming intensity or not.

Description

一种控制用户设备进行测量的方法及装置 技术领域  Method and device for controlling user equipment for measurement

本发明涉及无线通信领域, 尤其涉及一种控制用户设备 ( UE , User Equipment )进行测量的方法及装置。 背景技术  The present invention relates to the field of wireless communications, and in particular, to a method and apparatus for controlling user equipment (UE, User Equipment) to perform measurements. Background technique

在长期演进(LTE, Long Term Evolution ) 系统中, UE需要对所在服务小 区的接收信号进行测量以进行无线资源管理。 目前, 为减小 UE测量小区的接 收信号而消耗的电量和计算开销, UE 不需要一直对同频 /异频的非服务小区进 行测量,只需要当检测到服务小区的参考信号接收功率( RSRP, Reference Signal Received Power )低于预置的门限时, UE才开始对同频 /异频的非服务小区进行 测量。  In a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, a UE needs to measure a received signal of a serving cell for radio resource management. Currently, in order to reduce the power consumption and computational overhead consumed by the UE to measure the received signal of the cell, the UE does not need to always measure the non-serving cell of the same frequency/inter-frequency, and only needs to detect the reference signal received power of the serving cell (RSRP). When the Reference Signal Received Power is lower than the preset threshold, the UE starts to measure the non-serving cell of the same frequency/inter-frequency.

但是, 随着无线通信技术的发展, 逐步出现能够适应多种覆盖范围的基站 类型, 包括: 为大范围内的 UE提供通信而部署的覆盖范围大的基站, 其服务 小区通常称为宏小区 (Macro Cell ); 另外, 还会提供一些覆盖范围小、 发射功 率较低的 '』、型基站或传输点( TP , Transmission Point ), 与小型基站对应的节点 为低功率节点 ( LPN , Low Power Node ) , 这些 LPN对应的小区又称为小小区 ( Small Cell )。 在宏小区和小小区同时共存时, 小小区可能作为热点部署在宏 小区的非边缘位置, 若宏小区服务的 UE (宏 UE )仍采用基于所在服务小区的 RSRP控制是否开启对同频 /异频的非服务小区的测量, 则可能出现由于位于宏 小区内部非边缘位置的宏 UE所测量到宏小区的 RSRP—直高于用于启动对非 服务小区的测量的门限, 如此 UE就会不启动对非服务小区的测量, 最终导致 UE无法发现自身已靠近热点区域的小小区。  However, with the development of wireless communication technologies, there are gradually emerging types of base stations that can adapt to multiple coverage areas, including: large coverage base stations deployed to provide communication for a wide range of UEs, whose serving cells are usually called macro cells ( Macro Cell ); In addition, some small-capacity, low-transmitting '』, type base stations or transmission points (TP, Transmission Point) are provided, and nodes corresponding to small base stations are low-power nodes (LPN, Low Power Node). ), the cells corresponding to these LPNs are also called Small Cells. When the macro cell and the small cell coexist at the same time, the small cell may be deployed as a hot spot in the non-edge location of the macro cell. If the UE served by the macro cell (macro UE) still uses the RSRP control based on the serving cell to enable the same frequency/different For the measurement of the frequency non-serving cell, the RSRP of the macro cell measured by the macro UE located at the non-edge location inside the macro cell may be directly higher than the threshold for starting the measurement of the non-serving cell, so the UE will not The measurement of the non-serving cell is initiated, and finally the UE cannot discover the small cell that is close to the hotspot area.

可见,现有技术中,在 UE不实时开启同频 /异频非服务小区的测量功能时, UE无法及时发现宏小区中的小小区,导致无法减少宏小区的负荷,无法提高对 UE的服务质量。 发明内容 It can be seen that, in the prior art, when the UE does not start the measurement function of the same-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell in real time, the UE cannot discover the small cell in the macro cell in time, and the load of the macro cell cannot be reduced, and the service to the UE cannot be improved. quality. Summary of the invention

有鉴于此, 本发明实施例提供一种控制 UE进行测量的方法及装置, 能在 UE 不实时开启同频 /异频非服务小区的测量功能时, 及时发现宏小区中的小小 区, 减少宏小区的负荷, 提高对 UE的服务质量。  In view of this, the embodiments of the present invention provide a method and a device for controlling a UE to perform measurement, and can detect a small cell in a macro cell in time when the UE does not open the measurement function of the same-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell in real time, and reduce the macro. The load of the cell improves the quality of service to the UE.

本发明实施例提供了一种控制 UE进行测量的方法, 该方法包括:  The embodiment of the invention provides a method for controlling a UE to perform measurement, and the method includes:

UE测量第一下行信号对应的 RE上的干扰强度, 基于所述干扰强度确 定是否开启对非服务小区的测量。  The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, and determines whether to open the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the interference strength.

上述方案中, 所述 UE测量指定的第一下行信号对应的 RE上信号的干 扰强度之前, 该方法还包括:  In the above solution, before the UE measures the interference strength of the signal on the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal, the method further includes:

所述 UE接收第一下行信号的测量配置信息;  Receiving, by the UE, measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal;

其中, 所述测量配置信息为第一下行信号的资源位置信息, 包括以下至 少之一: 子帧配置信息、 频域配置信息、 端口信息; 所述第一下行信号包括: 信道状态信息参考信号 CSI-RS、 或小区级参考信号 CRS、 或同步信号 SS、 或发现信号。  The measurement configuration information is resource location information of the first downlink signal, and includes at least one of the following: subframe configuration information, frequency domain configuration information, and port information; the first downlink signal includes: channel state information reference Signal CSI-RS, or cell level reference signal CRS, or synchronization signal SS, or discovery signal.

上述方案中, 所述 UE测量第一下行信号对应的 RE上的干扰强度, 包 括:  In the above solution, the UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, and includes:

UE测量零功率第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强度并将其作为所述 干扰强度。  The UE measures the reception strength on the RE corresponding to the zero-power first downlink signal and uses it as the interference strength.

上述方案中, 所述 UE测量第一下行信号对应的 RE上的干扰强度, 包 括:  In the above solution, the UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, and includes:

UE测量第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强度以及第一下行信号接收 功率, 并将二者之差作为所述干扰强度。  The UE measures the received strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal and the received power of the first downlink signal, and uses the difference between the two as the interference strength.

上述方案中, 所述 UE测量第一下行信号对应的 RE上的干扰强度, 包 括:  In the above solution, the UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, and includes:

UE测量经过对第一下行信号进行干扰消除操作之后的第一下行信号对 应的 RE上的接收强度, 并将该接收强度作为所述干扰强度。 上述方案中, 所述基于所述干扰强度确定是否开启对非服务小区的测 量, 包括: The UE measures the reception strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal after performing the interference cancellation operation on the first downlink signal, and uses the received strength as the interference strength. In the foregoing solution, determining, according to the interference strength, whether to enable measurement of a non-serving cell, includes:

所述 UE测量指定的第二下行信号的接收功率, 根据所述第二下行信号 的接收功率与所述干扰强度之间的比值, 确定是否开启对非服务小区的测 量;  The UE measures the received power of the specified second downlink signal, and determines whether to measure the non-serving cell according to a ratio between the received power of the second downlink signal and the interference strength;

其中, 所述第二下行信号的接收功率为参考信号接收功率 RSRP, 或信 道状态信息参考信号接收功率 CSI-RSRP, 或同步信号接收功率。  The received power of the second downlink signal is a reference signal received power RSRP, or a channel state information reference signal received power CSI-RSRP, or a synchronous signal received power.

上述方案中, 所述确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量, 包括: 当所述 UE确定所述干扰强度高于或不低于启动对非服务小区进行测量 的门限值时, 对非服务小区进行测量。  In the foregoing solution, the determining whether to enable the measurement of the non-serving cell includes: when the UE determines that the interference strength is higher or lower than a threshold for starting measurement on the non-serving cell, the non-serving cell Make measurements.

上述方案中, 所述确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量, 包括: 利用所述干扰强度、所述第二下行信号的接收功率与干扰强度之间的比 值、 RSRP、 RSRQ、 以及 CSI-RSRP中至少两个参数, 控制对非服务小区的 测量。  In the foregoing solution, the determining whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell includes: using the interference strength, a ratio between a received power of the second downlink signal and an interference strength, RSRP, RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP At least two parameters control the measurement of the non-serving cell.

上述方案中,所述基于所述干扰强度确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量 之后, 该方法还包括: 开启对非服务小区的测量;  In the foregoing solution, after determining, according to the interference strength, whether to enable measurement of a non-serving cell, the method further includes: enabling measurement of the non-serving cell;

其中, 所述开启对非服务小区的测量包括:  The measuring the non-serving cell includes:

所述 UE自行启动对非服务小区的测量;  The UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell by itself;

或者, 所述 UE向服务基站报告测量结果或发送强干扰指示, 所述服务 基站配置对非服务小区的测量。  Alternatively, the UE reports a measurement result or sends a strong interference indication to the serving base station, and the serving base station configures measurement of the non-serving cell.

上述方案中, 所述 UE接收第一下行信号的测量配置信息之前, 该方法 还包括:  In the above solution, before the UE receives the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal, the method further includes:

UE所在宏小区对应的服务基站与小小区对应的小型基站, 通过 X2接 口、 或 S1接口、 或网管 OAM、 或 UE对第一下行信号的配置进行协调。  The serving base station corresponding to the macro cell in which the UE is located and the small base station corresponding to the small cell coordinate the configuration of the first downlink signal through the X2 interface, or the S1 interface, or the network management OAM, or the UE.

上述方案中, 所述第一下行信号的资源包括: 授权频段的资源和非授权 频段的资源;  In the above solution, the resources of the first downlink signal include: resources of a licensed frequency band and resources of an unlicensed frequency band;

当所述第一下行信号的资源为所述非授权频段的资源时,除基于所述干 扰强度确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量之外, 所述方法还包括: 选择 UE 聚合载波、 以及激活和配置辅小区 scell。 When the resource of the first downlink signal is a resource of the unlicensed band, except for the The interference strength determines whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell, and the method further includes: selecting the UE to aggregate the carrier, and activating and configuring the secondary cell scell.

本发明实施例还提供了一种控制 UE进行测量的装置, 所述装置包括: 测 量模块和决策模块; 其中,  An embodiment of the present invention further provides an apparatus for controlling a UE to perform measurement, where the apparatus includes: a measurement module and a decision module;

测量模块, 配置为测量指定的第一下行信号对应的 RE上的干扰强度, 并把所述干扰强度发送给决策模块;  a measurement module, configured to measure an interference strength on the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal, and send the interference strength to the decision module;

决策模块, 配置为根据测量模块发来的所述 RE上第一下行信号的干扰 强度, 确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量。  The decision module is configured to determine whether to open the measurement of the non-serving cell according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE sent by the measurement module.

上述方案中, 所述装置还包括: 接收模块, 配置为接收并保存第一下行 信号的测量配置信息, 并将第一下行信号的测量配置信息发送给测量模块; 相应的, 所述测量模块, 配置为接收并保存接收模块发来的测量配置信 其中, 所述测量配置信息为第一下行信号的资源位置信息, 包括以下至 少之一: 子帧配置信息、 频域配置信息、 端口信息; 所述第一下行信号包括: 信道状态信息参考信号 CSI-RS、 或小区级参考信号 CRS、 或同步信号 SS、 或发现信号。  In the above solution, the device further includes: a receiving module, configured to receive and save measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal, and send the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal to the measurement module; correspondingly, the measurement The module is configured to receive and save the measurement configuration information sent by the receiving module, where the measurement configuration information is resource location information of the first downlink signal, and includes at least one of the following: subframe configuration information, frequency domain configuration information, and port The first downlink signal includes: a channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, or a cell level reference signal CRS, or a synchronization signal SS, or a discovery signal.

上述方案中, 所述测量模块, 配置为测量零功率第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强度并将其作为所述干扰强度。  In the above solution, the measuring module is configured to measure the receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the zero-power first downlink signal and use the interference strength as the interference strength.

上述方案中, 所述测量模块, 配置为测量第一下行信号对应的 RE上的 接收强度以及第一下行信号接收功率, 并将二者之差作为所述干扰强度。  In the above solution, the measuring module is configured to measure a receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal and a received power of the first downlink signal, and use the difference between the two as the interference strength.

上述方案中, 所述测量模块, 配置为测量经过对第一下行信号进行干扰 消除操作之后的第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强度, 并将该接收强度作 为所述干扰强度。  In the above solution, the measuring module is configured to measure a receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal after performing the interference canceling operation on the first downlink signal, and use the receiving strength as the interference strength.

上述方案中, 所述决策模块, 配置为测量指定的第二下行信号的接收功 率,根据所述第二下行信号的接收功率与所述干扰强度之间的比值以及判定 准则, 确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量; 其中, 所述第二下行信号的接收 功率为参考信号接收功率 RSRP , 或信道状态信息参考信号接收功率 CSI- SRP, 或同步信号接收功率。 In the above solution, the determining module is configured to measure a received power of the specified second downlink signal, and determine whether to enable the right or not according to a ratio between the received power of the second downlink signal and the interference strength and a determination criterion. The measurement of the serving cell; wherein, the received power of the second downlink signal is a reference signal received power RSRP, or a channel state information reference signal received power CSI-SRP, or sync signal received power.

上述方案中, 所述决策模块, 配置为执行判定准则; 其中, 所述判定准 则, 包括: 当所述 UE确定所述干扰强度高于或不低于所述启动对非服务小 区进行测量的门限值时, 对非服务小区进行测量。  In the foregoing solution, the determining module is configured to execute a determining criterion, where the determining criterion includes: when the UE determines that the interference strength is higher or lower than the starting to measure the non-serving cell For the limit, measurements are made for non-serving cells.

上述方案中, 所述决策模块, 配置为执行判定准则; 其中, 所述判定准 则, 包括: 利用所述干扰强度、 所述第二下行信号的接收强度与干扰强度之 间的比值、 RSRP、 RSRQ、 以及 CSI-RSRP中至少两个参数, 控制对非服务 小区的测量。  In the foregoing solution, the determining module is configured to execute a determining criterion, where the determining criterion includes: using the interference strength, a ratio between a receiving strength of the second downlink signal and an interference strength, RSRP, RSRQ And at least two parameters in the CSI-RSRP, controlling the measurement of the non-serving cell.

上述方案中, 所述决策模块, 配置为开启对非服务小区的测量; 其中, 所述开启对非服务小区的测量包括: 所述 UE 自行启动对非服务 小区的测量; 或者, 所述 UE向服务基站报告测量结果或强干扰指示, 以便 所述服务基站配置对非服务小区的测量。  In the foregoing solution, the determining module is configured to enable measurement of the non-serving cell, where the measuring the non-serving cell is: the UE starts the measurement of the non-serving cell by itself; or The serving base station reports a measurement result or a strong interference indication so that the serving base station configures measurements for non-serving cells.

上述方案中, 所述第一下行信号的资源包括: 授权频段的资源和非授权 频段的资源;  In the above solution, the resources of the first downlink signal include: resources of a licensed frequency band and resources of an unlicensed frequency band;

所述决策模块,配置为当所述第一下行信号的资源为所述非授权频段的 资源时, 除基于所述干扰强度确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量之外, 选择 聚合载波、 以及激活和配置辅小区 scell。  The determining module is configured to: when the resource of the first downlink signal is a resource of the unlicensed frequency band, select, according to the interference strength, whether to enable measurement of a non-serving cell, select an aggregate carrier, and Activate and configure the secondary cell scell.

本发明实施例所提供的控制 UE进行测量的方法及装置, 能够通过测量指 定的第一下行信号对应的资源单元 (RE )上信号的接收强度, 确定当前 UE 是否接近宏小区中的小小区, 若接近, 则开启对小小区的信号测量, 否则, 不开启对小小区的信号测量, 如此就能够不实时开启同频 /异频非服务小区的 测量功能的情况下,保证及时发现宏小区中的小小区, 从而减少宏小区的负荷, 提高对 UE的服务质量。 附图说明  The method and device for controlling measurement by a UE according to an embodiment of the present invention can determine whether a current UE is close to a small cell in a macro cell by measuring a received strength of a signal on a resource unit (RE) corresponding to the specified first downlink signal. If it is close, the signal measurement on the small cell is started. Otherwise, the signal measurement on the small cell is not turned on, so that the measurement function of the same-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell can be started in real time, and the macro cell is timely discovered. The small cell in the network reduces the load on the macro cell and improves the quality of service to the UE. DRAWINGS

图 1为本发明实施例的控制 UE进行测量的方法流程示意图一;  FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart 1 of a method for controlling a UE to perform measurement according to an embodiment of the present invention;

图 2为本发明实施例的控制 UE进行测量的装置组成结构示意图; 图 3为本发明实施例的控制 UE进行测量的方法流程示意图二; 图 4为本发明实施例的宏小区与小小区共存时资源协调示意图一; 图 5为本发明实施例的宏小区与小小区共存时资源协调示意图二; 图 6为本发明实施例的宏小区与小小区共存时资源协调示意图三。 具体实施方式 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for controlling a measurement performed by a UE according to an embodiment of the present invention; 3 is a schematic flowchart 2 of a method for controlling measurement by a UE according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of resource coordination when a macro cell and a small cell coexist in an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a macro cell and a small embodiment according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of resource coordination when a macro cell and a small cell coexist in the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. detailed description

下面结合附图及具体实施例对本发明再作进一步详细的说明。  The present invention will be further described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings and specific embodiments.

本发明实施例的控制 UE进行测量的方法, 如图 1所示, 包括以下步驟: 步驟 101 : UE测量指定的第一下行信号对应的 RE上的干扰强度。  The method for controlling the measurement by the UE in the embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 1 , includes the following steps: Step 101: The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal.

这里, 所述第一下行信号可以为当前服务小区的零功率下行信号, 也可 以为当前服务小区的非零功率下行信号;其中,所述零功率下行信号可以为: 零功率 CSI-RS (包括 CSI干扰测量资源 Interference Measurement Resource, CSI-IMR ) 、 或零功率 CRS、 或零功率 SS、 或零功率发现信号; 所述非零 功率下行信号可以为: 非零功率 CSI-RS、 或非零功率 CRS、 或非零功率同 步信号、 或非零功率发现信号。  Here, the first downlink signal may be a zero-power downlink signal of the current serving cell, or may be a non-zero-power downlink signal of the current serving cell; wherein the zero-power downlink signal may be: a zero-power CSI-RS ( Including CSI Interference Measurement Resource (CSI-IMR), or zero-power CRS, or zero-power SS, or zero-power discovery signal; the non-zero-power downlink signal may be: non-zero-power CSI-RS, or non-zero Power CRS, or non-zero power sync signal, or non-zero power discovery signal.

所述指定的第一下行信号对应的 RE为 UE根据接收到的第一下行信号 的测量配置信息进行配置;  The RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal is configured by the UE according to the measured configuration information of the received first downlink signal;

其中, 所述第一下行信号的测量配置信息可以为宏基站发送给 UE, 包 括: 第一下行信号的资源配置列表、 子帧配置信息、 用于启动对非服务小区 进行测量的门限值等。  The measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal may be sent to the UE by the macro base station, and includes: a resource configuration list of the first downlink signal, subframe configuration information, and a threshold for starting measurement on the non-serving cell. Value, etc.

所述测量为现有技术, 这里不做赘述。  The measurement is prior art and will not be described here.

优选地, 执行步驟 101之前, 服务小区的基站还会与小小区的小型基站 进行资源协调, 可以通过 X2接口、 S1接口、 或通过网管 (OAM )甚至 UE (但不限于这些接口) 进行。  Preferably, before performing step 101, the base station of the serving cell further performs resource coordination with the small base station of the small cell, and may perform through an X2 interface, an S1 interface, or through a network management (OAM) or even a UE (but not limited to these interfaces).

步驟 102: 所述 UE基于所述干扰强度确定是否开启对非服务小区的测 量。 本发明实施例提供的一种控制 UE进行测量的装置, 如图 2所示, 包括: 测量模块 21和决策模块 22; 其中, Step 102: The UE determines, according to the interference strength, whether to enable measurement of a non-serving cell. An apparatus for controlling a UE to perform measurement according to an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 2, includes: a measurement module 21 and a decision module 22;

测量模块 21 ,配置为测量指定的第一下行信号对应的 RE上信号的接收 强度, 并把所述信号的接收强度发送给决策模块 22;  The measuring module 21 is configured to measure the received strength of the signal on the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal, and send the received strength of the signal to the decision module 22;

决策模块 22, 配置为根据测量模块 21发来的所述 RE上第一下行信号 的接收强度, 决策是否开启对非服务小区的测量。  The decision module 22 is configured to determine whether to open the measurement of the non-serving cell according to the receiving strength of the first downlink signal on the RE sent by the measuring module 21.

所述装置还包括: 接收模块 23 , 配置为接收并保存第一下行信号的测 量配置信息, 并将第一下行信号的测量配置信息发送给测量模块 21 ; 相应 的,所述测量模块 21, 配置为接收并保存接收模块 23发来的测量配置信息; 其中, 所述测量配置信息为第一下行信号的资源位置信息, 包括以下至 少之一: 子帧配置信息、 频域配置信息、 端口信息; 所述第一下行信号包括: CSI-RS、 或 CRS、 或 SS、 或发现信号。  The device further includes: a receiving module 23 configured to receive and save measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal, and send the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal to the measurement module 21; correspondingly, the measurement module 21 And configuring, to receive and save the measurement configuration information sent by the receiving module 23, where the measurement configuration information is resource location information of the first downlink signal, and includes at least one of the following: subframe configuration information, frequency domain configuration information, Port information; the first downlink signal includes: a CSI-RS, or a CRS, or an SS, or a discovery signal.

所述测量模块 21 , 配置为测量第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强度、 以及第一下行信号的接收功率, 并将二者之差作为所述干扰强度。  The measuring module 21 is configured to measure a receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal and a received power of the first downlink signal, and use the difference between the two as the interference strength.

所述测量模块 21 , 配置为测量对第一下行信号进行干扰消除操作之后 的第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强度, 并将该接收强度作为所述干扰强 度。  The measuring module 21 is configured to measure a receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal after performing the interference cancellation operation on the first downlink signal, and use the received strength as the interference strength.

所述决策模块 22 , 配置为测量指定的第二下行信号的接收功率, 根据 所述第二下行信号的接收功率与所述干扰强度之间的比值以及判定准则,确 定是否开启对非服务小区的测量; 其中, 所述第二下行信号的接收功率为参 考信号接收功率 RSRP, 或信道状态信息参考信号接收功率 CSI-RSRP, 或同 步信号接收功率。  The determining module 22 is configured to measure a received power of the specified second downlink signal, determine, according to a ratio between the received power of the second downlink signal and the interference strength, and a determination criterion, whether to enable the non-serving cell The receiving power of the second downlink signal is a reference signal received power RSRP, or a channel state information reference signal received power CSI-RSRP, or a synchronization signal received power.

所述决策模块 22, 配置为执行判定准则; 其中, 所述判定准则, 包括: 当所述 UE确定所述干扰强度高于或不低于所述启动对非服务小区进行测量 的门限值时, 对非服务小区进行测量。  The determining module 22 is configured to execute a determining criterion, where the determining criterion includes: when the UE determines that the interference strength is higher or lower than a threshold value for starting to measure a non-serving cell , measure the non-serving cell.

所述决策模块 22, 配置为执行判定准则; 其中, 所述判定准则, 包括: 利用所述干扰强度、 所述第二下行 ''t号的接收强度与干扰强度之间的比值、 RSRP、 RSRQ、 以及 CSI-RSRP中至少两个参数, 控制对非服务小区的测量。 所述决策模块 22, 配置为开启对非服务小区的测量; 其中, 所述开启 对非服务小区的测量包括: 所述 UE 自行启动对非服务小区的测量; 或者, 所述 UE向服务基站报告测量结果或强干扰指示, 以便所述服务基站配置对 非服务小区的测量。 The determining module 22 is configured to execute a determining criterion, where the determining criterion includes: using the interference strength, a ratio between a receiving strength of the second downlink 't number and an interference strength, At least two parameters of RSRP, RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP control the measurement of the non-serving cell. The determining module 22 is configured to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. The measuring the non-serving cell includes: the UE starts the measurement of the non-serving cell by itself; or the UE reports to the serving base station. The measurement result or strong interference indication is such that the serving base station configures measurements for non-serving cells.

上述测量模块 21和决策模块 22均可以由 CPU或 DSP等硬件实现。 实施例一、  Both the measurement module 21 and the decision module 22 described above can be implemented by hardware such as a CPU or a DSP. Embodiment 1

本发明控制 UE进行测量的方法的一个实施例, 可以如图 3所示, 假设 当前宏小区( Macro Cell )和小小区 picol以及 pico2共存的示意图如图 4所 示, 其中, Macro Cell有较大的覆盖范围, pico l和 pico2的覆盖范围较小。  An embodiment of the method for controlling the UE to perform measurement may be as shown in FIG. 3, and a schematic diagram of the current macro cell and the small cell picol and pico2 coexisting is shown in FIG. 4, wherein the Macro Cell has a larger The coverage, pico l and pico2 have a smaller coverage.

步驟 301: Macro Cell与小小区之间进行资源协调。  Step 301: Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.

具体的, Macro Cell和小小区进行协调, 例如通过 X2接口、 S 1接口、 或通过网管 (OAM ) 、 或 UE (不限于需要进行小小区发现的 UE ) 进行。  Specifically, the macro cell and the small cell coordinate, for example, through an X2 interface, an S1 interface, or through an network management (OAM), or a UE (not limited to a UE that needs to perform small cell discovery).

以 X2 接口的协调为例, 宏小区可以通过 X2 Setup 流程消息, ENB Taking the coordination of the X2 interface as an example, the macro cell can pass the X2 Setup flow message, ENB.

Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向小小区指示宏小区 的零功率 CSI-RS的配置信息 (宏小区还可以通过 handover preparation流程 消息中携带的基站间的 RRC信息例如 AS-Config将宏小区的零功率 CSI-RS 的配置信息通知小小区) , 或者宏小区通过上述 X2消息向小小区推荐 (小 小区的) 非零功率 CSI-RS的配置信息, 小小区接收到该配置信息后即可以 对其自身的非零功率 CSI-RS进行配置, 以完成小区间的协调。 反过来, 小 小区也可以通过 X2 Setu 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向宏小区指示其非零功率 CSI-RS的配置, 宏小区于是 通过空口为 UE配置相应的零功率 CSI-RS测量。 The configuration update process message, or the X2 message such as the Load Information message, directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) indicates the configuration information of the zero-power CSI-RS of the macro cell to the small cell (the macro cell can also be prepared by handover) The RRC information between the base stations carried in the flow message, for example, AS-Config notifies the small cell of the configuration information of the zero-power CSI-RS of the macro cell, or the macro cell recommends the non-zero power to the small cell (the small cell) through the X2 message. The configuration information of the CSI-RS, after receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own non-zero power CSI-RS to complete the coordination between the cells. Conversely, the small cell can also indicate its non-zero power CSI to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setu flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message. - The configuration of the RS, the macro cell then configures the corresponding zero-power CSI-RS measurement for the UE through the air interface.

通过 S 1接口或者其它接口协调小区间的配置的方法包括: 宏基站通过 MME和 /或网关( gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW )向对方基站传递零功率 CSI-RS的配置或者推荐非零功率 CSI-RS的配置, 和 /或, 小基站通过 MME 和 /或网关( gateway,例如 HeNB GW,S 1 GW )向宏基站传递非零功率 CSI-RS 的配置或者推荐零功率 CSI-RS的配置。 A method for coordinating inter-cell configuration through an S1 interface or other interfaces includes: The MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW) delivers the configuration of the zero-power CSI-RS or the configuration of the recommended non-zero-power CSI-RS to the opposite base station, and/or the small base station passes the MME and/or the gateway ( The gateway, for example HeNB GW, S 1 GW ), communicates the configuration of the non-zero power CSI-RS or the configuration of the recommended zero power CSI-RS to the macro base station.

通过网管系统协调小区间的配置的方法包括: 网管系统向宏基站指示零 功率 CSI-RS配置, 网管系统向小基站指示非零功率 CSI-RS配置; 或者网 管系统向宏基站发送小小区的非零功率 CSI-RS配置信息, 向小基站发送宏 小区的零功率 CSI-RS配置信息。 通过 UE传递 macro和小小区间的配置具 体方式包括, 宏 UE 在切换到小小区后将之前宏小区为其配置的零功率 CSI-RS 配置信息发送给小小区, 或者, 小小区切换到宏小区后将之前小小 区为其配置的非零功率 CSI-RS配置信息发送给宏小区, 或者,宏基站让 UE 通过测量过程接收小小区的系统信息,其中包括非零功率 CSI-RS配置信息, 并由 UE上报给宏基站。  The method for coordinating inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates a zero-power CSI-RS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates a non-zero-power CSI-RS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the small cell to the macro base station. The zero-power CSI-RS configuration information sends the zero-power CSI-RS configuration information of the macro cell to the small base station. The specific manner of transmitting the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: the macro UE sends the zero-power CSI-RS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell after switching to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell. The non-zero-power CSI-RS configuration information configured by the small cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive system information of the small cell, including non-zero-power CSI-RS configuration information, by using a measurement process, and Reported by the UE to the macro base station.

优选地, 由于 CSI-RS会带来一定的开销, 为降低小小区的 CSI-RS的 开销, 又不至于影响基于干扰强度的非服务小区测量控制的准确性, 小小区 也可以在与宏小区 ZP CSI-RS对应的 RE位置上传输数据 (data ) 或者仿制 数据(dummy ) 。 例如, 如果测量带宽所对应的 PRB上小小区有数据发送, 则正常发送数据, 否则就发送 dummy RE; 或者在与宏小区 ZP CSI-RS对应 的 RE位置上 pico总是发送 dummy RE , dummy RE之外的 RE上可以正常 传输数据。  Preferably, since the CSI-RS brings a certain overhead, in order to reduce the CSI-RS overhead of the small cell without affecting the accuracy of the non-serving cell measurement control based on the interference strength, the small cell may also be in the macro cell. The data (data) or the dummy data (dummy) is transmitted at the RE location corresponding to the ZP CSI-RS. For example, if the small cell on the PRB corresponding to the measurement bandwidth has data transmission, the data is normally transmitted, otherwise the dummy RE is sent; or the pico always sends the dummy RE, the dummy RE at the RE position corresponding to the macro cell ZP CSI-RS. Data can be transferred normally on other REs.

另外, 小小区也可以分组, 同一组内的小小区的 CSI-RS时频资源对齐, 或者都与宏小区的同一个 ZP CSI-RS配置对应。分组的依据可以根据部署需 要而定, 例如: 按照地理区域进行分组、 或者按照小基站的功率大小或覆盖 范围进行分组、 或者按照 backhaul的类型分组、 或者按照小小区的 CSG (封 闭用户组, closed subscriber group )属性进行分组, 例如开放式 ( open mode ) 小小区, 封闭式(closed mode ) 小小区, 混合式( hybrid mode ) 小小区, 其 中开放式小小区任何用户都可以正常接入,封闭式小小区只有成员用户可以 接入, 非成员用户不能接入, 混合式小小区对于成员用户优先接入和服务, 非成员用户也可以接入。 针对分组的小小区等情况, 宏基站可以配置多个In addition, the small cells may also be grouped, and the CSI-RS time-frequency resources of the small cells in the same group are aligned, or both correspond to the same ZP CSI-RS configuration of the macro cell. The basis of the grouping may be determined according to the deployment needs, for example: grouping according to geographical area, grouping according to the power size or coverage of the small base station, grouping according to the type of backhaul, or CSG according to the small cell (closed user group, closed Subscriber group) attribute grouping, for example, open mode small cell, closed mode small cell, hybrid mode small cell, where any user of open small cell can access normally, closed type Small cells can only be used by member users. Access, non-member users can not access, hybrid small cells preferential access and services for member users, non-member users can also access. For a small cell of a packet, etc., the macro base station can be configured with multiple

ZP-CSI-RSSI或 CSI-RSRQ测量, 每个测量配置可以有不同的 ZP-CSI-RS资 源配置。 For ZP-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ measurements, each measurement configuration can have different ZP-CSI-RS resource configurations.

步驟 302: UE接收宏基站发来的测量配置信息。  Step 302: The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.

这里, 所述测量配置信息包括: 第一下行信号的资源配置信息(干扰测 量资源配置信息) , 其中包括零功率资源配置列表和零功率子帧配置信息。 所述测量配置信息还包括用于控制是否启动对非服务小区进行测量的启动 测量门限值, 和 /或用于过滤测量数值的参数信息 k。  Here, the measurement configuration information includes: resource configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information) of the first downlink signal, where the zero power resource configuration list and the zero power subframe configuration information are included. The measurement configuration information further includes a start measurement threshold for controlling whether to initiate measurement for the non-serving cell, and/or parameter information k for filtering the measured value.

所述宏基站下发的第一下行信号的测量配置信息可以为:宏基站通过无 线链路重配消息( RRCConnectionReconfiguration )下发第一下行信号的测量 配置信息。  The measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station may be: the macro base station sends the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration).

所述第一下行信号为零功率 CSI-RS;  The first downlink signal is a zero power CSI-RS;

所述第一下行信号对应的 RE的选定包括: 如图 4所示, 每个传输节点 都有一个下行资源块(RB, Resource Block ) , RB由一系列的 RE组成, 每 个 RE由 (k, 1 ) 二维坐标表示, 其中 k代表频域的子载波(subcarrier ) 索 引, 1代表时域的符号索引。 当 1=5 , 6时, 从上往下数(从 1开始计数) 第 3个子载波对应的 2个 RE对应的是宏小区的非零功率信道状态信息参考信 号 (CSI-RS , Channel State Information-Reference Signal ) , 从上往下数第 4 个子载波对应的 2个 RE对应的是零功率 CSI-RS。 在 picol和 pico2中, 当 1=5、 6时, 从上往下数第 3个子载波对应的 2个 RE对应的是小小区的零功 率 CSI-RS,从上往下数第 4个子载波对应的 2个 RE对应的是小小区的非零 功率 CSI-RS。 也就是说, Macro Cell的零功率 CSI-RS的 RE位置对应的是 picol和 pico2的非零功率 CSI-RS的位置, 而 macro的非零功率 CSI-RS的 RE位置对应的 picol和 pico2的零功率 CSI-RS的位置。  The selection of the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal includes: as shown in FIG. 4, each transmission node has a downlink resource block (RB), and the RB is composed of a series of REs, and each RE is composed of (k, 1) Two-dimensional coordinate representation, where k represents the subcarrier index of the frequency domain and 1 represents the symbol index of the time domain. When 1=5, 6 , the number from the top to the bottom (counting from 1) The 2 REs corresponding to the 3rd subcarrier correspond to the non-zero power channel state information reference signal of the macro cell (CSI-RS, Channel State Information) -Reference Signal ), the two REs corresponding to the fourth subcarrier from the top correspond to the zero-power CSI-RS. In picol and pico2, when 1=5 and 6, the two REs corresponding to the third subcarrier from the top correspond to the zero-power CSI-RS of the small cell, and the fourth subcarrier corresponding to the top from the top. The 2 REs correspond to the non-zero power CSI-RS of the small cell. That is, the RE position of the zero-power CSI-RS of the Macro Cell corresponds to the position of the non-zero power CSI-RS of picol and pico2, and the RE position of the non-zero power CSI-RS of the macro corresponds to the picol and pico2 The location of the power CSI-RS.

所述指定的第一下行信号对应的 RE由 UE接收所在服务小区的宏基站 下发的第一下行信号的测量配置信息所指示。 宏基站为 UE的零功率 CSI-RS测量配置还可以包括零功率 CSI-RSSI测 量的带宽; The RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal is indicated by the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal that is sent by the macro base station of the serving cell. The zero base power CSI-RS measurement configuration of the macro base station for the UE may further include a bandwidth of zero power CSI-RSSI measurement;

这里, 所述零功率 CSI-RSSI测量的带宽的配置包括测量中心频点和带 宽 (RB个数) , RB起始索引和结束索引, RB起始索引和 RB数, 等等。 这样, 即便宏小区与小小区不同频, 只要宏小区与小小区的频谱有交叠, 则 可以通过在交叠的带宽上的测量来判断是否靠近了异频的小小区,从而启动 对异频的小小区的测量。  Here, the configuration of the bandwidth measured by the zero-power CSI-RSSI includes measuring a center frequency point and a bandwidth (the number of RBs), an RB start index and an end index, an RB start index, and an RB number, and the like. In this way, even if the macro cell and the small cell are different in frequency, as long as the spectrums of the macro cell and the small cell overlap, it is possible to determine whether or not the small cell of the different frequency is close by measuring on the overlapping bandwidth, thereby starting the inter-frequency. Measurement of small cells.

步驟 303: UE根据所述测量配置信息, 测量零功率 CSI-RS对应的 RE 上的接收强度。  Step 303: The UE measures the receiving strength on the RE corresponding to the zero-power CSI-RS according to the measurement configuration information.

所述测量包括: UE基于物理层的测量, 即所测带宽上的零功率 CSI-RS The measurement includes: the UE is based on physical layer measurement, that is, zero power CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth.

(或干扰测量资源 )对应的 RE上的总接收功率的线性平均值, 使用计算公 式进行测量数据的过滤, 得到所述 RE上第一下行信号的接收强度。 所述计 算公式为 ^ 1—" ^ " ^ "; 其中, a = l/2(k/4 M„ 来自物理层的最新测 量结果, F„是更新后的过滤后的测量结果。 (or the interference measurement resource) a linear average of the total received power on the RE, and the measurement data is filtered using a calculation formula to obtain the reception strength of the first downlink signal on the RE. The calculation formula is ^ 1 - " ^ " ^ "; where a = l / 2 (k / 4 M „ the latest measurement from the physical layer, F „ is the updated filtered measurement.

步驟 304: 所述 UE基于所述 RE上第一下行信号的接收强度, 确定是 否开启对非服务小区的测量。  Step 304: The UE determines, according to the receiving strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell.

具体的, 所述 UE判断所述 RE上第一下行信号的接收强度是否不低于 或高于启动测量门限值, 如果是, 则 UE启动对非服务小区进行测量; 否贝' J , Specifically, the UE determines whether the receiving strength of the first downlink signal on the RE is not lower than or higher than a starting measurement threshold, and if yes, the UE starts to measure the non-serving cell;

UE不测量同频和异频的非服务小区或小小区。 The UE does not measure non-serving cells or small cells of the same frequency and different frequency.

以图 4为例, 宏 UE0由于离 picol和 pico2都比较远, 测得的所述 RE 上第一下行信号的接收强度可能会低于启动测量门限值, 因此不会启动对非 月良务小区 (或小小区 ) 的测量; 而宏 UE1和宏 UE2由于分别靠近 picol和 pico2, 测到的所述 RE上第一下行信号的接收强度会较高, 并且随着它们各 自靠近 picol和 pico2, 会趋向于增大, 当它们各自测到的所述 RE上第一下 行信号的接收强度大于启动测量门限值时, UE1、 UE2各自就会启动对非服 务小区 (或小小区) 的测量。 所述 UE启动对非服务小区进行测量包括: UE直接启动对非服务小区 进行测量; 或者, UE在判定满足基站配置的上报条件时, 向服务基站报告 测量结果, 服务基站根据测量结果进行非服务小区 (或小小区)的测量配置 和 /或测量的启动。 Taking FIG. 4 as an example, the macro UE0 is far away from picol and pico2, and the measured reception strength of the first downlink signal on the RE may be lower than the starting measurement threshold, so the non-monthly The measurement of the cell (or small cell); while the macro UE1 and the macro UE2 are close to picol and pico2, respectively, the received downlink signal on the RE has a higher reception strength, and as they are close to picol and pico2 The UE1 and the UE2 each start a non-serving cell (or a small cell) when the received strength of the first downlink signal on the RE that is measured by each of them is greater than the start measurement threshold. Measurement. The UE starts to perform measurement on the non-serving cell, and includes: the UE directly starts to perform measurement on the non-serving cell; or, when the UE determines that the reporting condition of the base station configuration is met, the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station, and the serving base station performs non-serving according to the measurement result. The measurement configuration of the cell (or small cell) and/or the initiation of the measurement.

以上基于 ZP-CSI-RSSI的测量反映的是非服务小区的接收信号强度,考 虑到在无线资源管理中通常用于决策的是服务小区与相邻小区的信号强度 的相对值, 因此还可以定义信道状态信息参考信号接收质量 (CSI-RSRQ ) 为信道状态信息参考信号接收功率 (CSI-RSRP , 物理层的测量是基于所测 带宽上的 CSI-RS对应的 RE上的 CSI-RS的功率贡献的线性平均值)与所述 干扰强度 ZP-CSI-RSSI的比值。 可以看出, UE计算的 CSI-RSRQ为 UE在 不同的 RE上测得的 CSI-RSRP和 ZP-CSI-RSSI的比值。 这个值反映了服务 小区的信号功率与非服务小区的信号强度的比值, 因此, 既能反映 UE是否 远离服务的宏小区, 也能反映 UE是否靠近小小区。 因此, UE也可以基于 上述定义的 CSI-RSRQ的测量来控制对非服务小区的测量。 当 CSI-RSRQ低 于 (或小于等于)基站配置的门限时, UE启动对非服务小区的测量, 否则 UE可以不测量非服务小区。  The above measurement based on ZP-CSI-RSSI reflects the received signal strength of the non-serving cell. Considering the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell, which is usually used for decision making in radio resource management, the channel can also be defined. The status information reference signal reception quality (CSI-RSRQ) is the channel state information reference signal reception power (CSI-RSRP, and the physical layer measurement is based on the power contribution of the CSI-RS on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth. Linear average) is the ratio of the interference intensity ZP-CSI-RSSI. It can be seen that the CSI-RSRQ calculated by the UE is the ratio of CSI-RSRP and ZP-CSI-RSSI measured by the UE on different REs. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the signal strength of the non-serving cell. Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the measurement of the CSI-RSRQ defined above. When the CSI-RSRQ is lower than (or less than or equal to) the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell.

在一个大范围的无线接入网络内,还可以通过大范围的协调来提高小小 区发现的性能, 例如使多个 Macro Cell的零功率 CSI-RS对应的 RE对齐, 从而使得 UE测到的 ZP-CSI-RSSI只反映小小区的功率强度, 这可以提高启 动小小区测量的准确性。 另一方面, 通常小小区发现的启动并不需要独自启 动, 小小区发现可以在非服务小区测量之中进行, 而对非服务小区的测量不 仅需要考虑小小区发现的需要, 也需要考虑在宏小区间的 UE移动性(例如 切换) 的需要, 为此, 可以采用联合判定准则。  In a large-scale radio access network, the performance of small cell discovery can also be improved through a large-scale coordination, for example, aligning REs corresponding to zero-power CSI-RSs of multiple Macro cells, so that the UE detects the ZP. - The CSI-RSSI only reflects the power strength of the small cell, which can improve the accuracy of starting small cell measurements. On the other hand, usually the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone, the small cell discovery can be performed in the non-serving cell measurement, and the measurement of the non-serving cell not only needs to consider the needs of small cell discovery, but also needs to be considered in the macro. The need for UE mobility (e.g., handover) for small intervals, for which a joint decision criterion can be employed.

所述联合判定准则包括: 将 ZP-CSI-RSSI或 CSI-RSRQ, 与 RSRP (基 于 CRS的)、 RSRQ或基于 CSI-RSRP的测量的至少两个联合起来控制对同 频 /异频非服务小区 (相邻小区 ) 的测量。 例如, 方式 1 : 如果 ZP-CSI-RSSI>threshold, 或 RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务 小区的测量; 方式 2: 当 ZP-CSI-RSSI>threshold, 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基 站配置的门限,启动对非服务小区的测量;方式 3:如果 CSI-RSRQ<thresholdl 或 RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 4: 如 果 CSI-RSRQ<thresholdl , 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限,启动对非 服务小区的测量。 如果测量的启动只针对小小区发现, 也可以将 ZP-CSI-RSSL CSI- SRQ. RSRP (基于 CRS的) 、 RSRQ、 CSI-RSRP中的 至少两个联合起来控制对小小区的测量,具体的例子将上面的 4种方式中的 条件判断的 "或" 关系改成 "且" 关系就可以了。 用单个条件的判断准则, 在单个条件的判断准则满足时再执行联合判定准 则, 具体的例子如下: 首先或缺省采用基于 CRS的 RSRP的判定准则, 当 基于 CRS测量值 RSRP小于预定义的或基站配置的门限值时, 再执行联合 判定准则以通过新的测量(例如 ZP-CSI-RSSI或 CSI-RSRQ的测量 )来确定 是否启动同频或异频测量。 又例如, 特定传输模式下的 UE使用联合判定准 则进行测量控制。 基站也可以显示地或隐含地通过信令指示 UE执行联合判 定准则, 这些信令包括 Radio Resource Control ( RRC ) 层 IE, MAC层控制 元 control element, 物理层下行控制信息 ( downlink control information, 缩 写为 DCI ) 。 The joint decision criterion includes: combining ZP-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ with at least two of RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ or CSI-RSRP-based measurements to control a co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell Measurement of (adjacent cell). For example, mode 1: if ZP-CSI-RSSI>threshold, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start to non-service Measurement of the cell; Mode 2: When ZP-CSI-RSSI>threshold, or CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 3: If CSI-RSRQ<thresholdl or RSRP is smaller than a certain The threshold configured by the base station starts the measurement of the non-serving cell; mode 4: If the CSI-RSRQ<threshold1, or the CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, the measurement of the non-serving cell is started. If the measurement is initiated only for small cell discovery, at least two of ZP-CSI-RSSL CSI-SRQ. RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP may be combined to control the measurement of the small cell. The example changes the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four ways to the "and" relationship. Using a single conditional criterion, the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied. The specific examples are as follows: First or default, the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined or When the base station configures the threshold, the joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (for example, measurement of ZP-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ). As another example, UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control. The base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).

另夕卜,上面的判定条件是使用测量值与门限值的大小比较作为判定依据 (或者判断依据之一) 的, 这种方法可称为强度判定法。 此外, 也可以考虑 根据测量值的增量作为启动同频 /异频测量的判别条件, 这种方法称为增量 判定法。 根据 ZP-CSI-RSSI 或 CSI-RSRQ 在一定时间内的增量: 测得 ZP-CSI-RSSI 增大意味着非服务小区信号 (或干扰信号) 强度增强, 如果 ZP-CSI-RSSI持续增强, 可能说明距离另一个小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动 测量; 或者, CSI-RSRQ的减小意味着干扰强度增加和 /或服务小区信号强度 减小, 如果 CSI-RSRQ持续减小, 可能说明距离服务小区越来越远, 而距离 相邻小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动测量。 增量判定法和强度判定法也可以联 合起来判别是否启动非服务小区或小小区测量。 实施例二、 In addition, the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method. In addition, it is also conceivable to use the increment of the measured value as the discriminating condition for starting the intra-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called the incremental decision method. According to ZP-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ in a certain time increment: The measured ZP-CSI-RSSI increase means that the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced in intensity, if ZP-CSI-RSSI continues to increase, It may be that the distance is closer and closer to another cell, and the measurement may be considered; or, the decrease of CSI-RSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the signal strength of the serving cell decreases. If the CSI-RSRQ continues to decrease, the distance may be indicated. The serving cell is getting farther and farther, and getting closer and closer to the neighboring cell, you can consider starting the measurement. Incremental decision method and intensity judgment method can also be linked Together, it is determined whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement. Embodiment 2

图 5是有宏小区 (图中的 macro )和小小区 (图中的 pico l和 pico2 )共 存的示意图。 图中可见, macro有较大的覆盖范围, pico l和 pico2的覆盖范 围较小(由于其传输功率较小)。 由于宏小区和小小区覆盖范围的巨大差别, 宏用户设备(macro UE )如果在任何地点都持续对非服务小区(也包括小小 区)进行测量, 会导致较大的用户设备耗电和计算开销, 因此需要有一个比 较省电的方法, 来判断宏用户设备是否靠近了小小区, 从而启动对包括小小 区在内的非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量。  Fig. 5 is a diagram showing the coexistence of a macro cell (macro in the figure) and a small cell (pico l and pico2 in the figure). As can be seen, the macro has a larger coverage, and pico l and pico2 have a smaller coverage (because of its smaller transmission power). Due to the huge difference in the coverage of the macro cell and the small cell, the macro UE continuously measures the non-serving cell (including the small cell) at any place, which results in a large user equipment power consumption and computational overhead. Therefore, it is necessary to have a more power-saving method to judge whether the macro user equipment is close to the small cell, thereby starting measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) including the small cell.

在图 5 中, 每个传输节点都有一个下行 RB , 资源块 RB由一系列的资 源单元 RE组成, 每个 RE由 (k, 1 ) 二维坐标表示, 其中 k代表频域的子 载波( subcarrier )索引, 1代表时域的符号索引。 当 1=0时, 从上往下数(从 1开始计数) 第 3个子载波对应的 RE对应的是宏小区的非零功率小区级参 考信号 ( cell-specific reference signal , 缩写为 CRS ) , 从上往下数第 4个子 载波对应的 RE对应的是零功率 CRS。再看 pico l和 pico2 ,可以发现, 当 1=0 时, 从上往下数第 4个子载波对应的 RE对应的是小小区的非零功率 CRS。 也就是说, macro的零功率 CRS的 E位置对应的是 picol和 pico2的非零 功率 CRS的位置。  In FIG. 5, each transmission node has a downlink RB, and the resource block RB is composed of a series of resource units RE, each RE is represented by (k, 1) two-dimensional coordinates, where k represents a frequency domain subcarrier ( Subcarrier ) index, 1 represents the symbol index of the time domain. When 1=0, the number from the top to the bottom (counting from 1) corresponds to the non-zero power cell-level reference signal (CRS) of the macro cell. The RE corresponding to the fourth subcarrier of the upper and lower numbers corresponds to a zero power CRS. Looking at pico l and pico2, it can be found that when 1=0, the RE corresponding to the 4th subcarrier from top to bottom corresponds to the non-zero power CRS of the small cell. That is, the E position of the macro zero power CRS corresponds to the position of the non-zero power CRS of picol and pico2.

步驟 401: Macro Cell与小小区之间进行资源协调。  Step 401: Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.

具体的, 通过 X2接口、 S 1接口、 通过网管 ( OAM ) 甚至 UE (不限于 需要进行小小区发现的 UE ) 进行 Macro Cell与小小区之间的资源协调。  Specifically, the resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell is performed through the X2 interface, the S1 interface, the network management (OAM), and even the UE (not limited to the UE that needs to perform small cell discovery).

以 X2 接口的协调为例, 宏小区可以通过 X2 Setup 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向小小区指示宏小区 的零功率 CRS的配置信息 (宏小区还可以通过 handover preparation流程消 息中携带的基站间的 R C信息例如 AS-Config将宏小区的零功率 CRS的配 置信息通知小小区) , 或者宏小区通过上述 X2消息向小小区推荐 (小小区 的) 非零功率 CRS 的配置信息, 小小区接收到该配置信息后即可以对其自 身的非零功率 CRS进行配置, 以完成小区间的协调。 反过来, 小小区也可 以通过 X2 Setup流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway , X2 proxy ) 向宏小区指示其非零功率 CRS 的配置, 宏小区于是通过空口为 UE配置相应的零功率 CRS测量。 通过 S 1接口或者其它接口协调小区间的 配置的方法包括,宏基站通过 MME和 /或网关( gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向对方基站传递零功率 CRS的配置或者推荐非零功率 CRS的配置, 和 Z或, 小基站通过 MME和 /或网关 ( gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向 宏基站传递非零功率 CRS的配置或者推荐零功率 CRS的配置。 通过网管系 统协调小区间的配置的方法包括, 网管系统向宏基站指示零功率 CRS配置, 网管系统向小基站指示非零功率 CRS 配置; 或者网管系统向宏基站发送小 小区的非零功率 CRS配置信息, 向小基站发送宏小区的零功率 CRS配置信 息。 通过 UE传递 macro和小小区间的配置具体方式包括, 宏 UE在切换到 小小区后将之前宏小区为其配置的零功率 CRS 配置信息发送给小小区, 或 者, 小小区切换到宏小区后将之前小小区为其配置的非零功率 CRS 配置信 息发送给宏小区,或者,宏基站让 UE通过测量过程接收小小区的系统信息, 其中包括非零功率 CRS配置信息, 并由 UE上报给宏基站。 通过 UE上报的 相邻小 区配置信息的方式也可以称为 自 组织 I自 优化网络技术 ( self-organizing/self-optimization network ) 。 Taking the coordination of the X2 interface as an example, the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message. Configuration information of the zero-power CRS of the cell (the macro cell can also allocate the zero-power CRS of the macro cell through the RC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config The small cell informs the small cell), or the macro cell recommends the configuration information of the non-zero power CRS (small cell) to the small cell through the X2 message, and the small cell can perform its own non-zero power CRS after receiving the configuration information. Configure to complete coordination between cells. Conversely, the small cell can also indicate its non-zero power CRS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setup flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message. The configuration, the macro cell then configures the corresponding zero-power CRS measurement for the UE through the air interface. The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes the macro base station transmitting a zero-power CRS configuration or recommending a non-zero-power CRS to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW) Configuration, and Z or, the small base station transmits the configuration of the non-zero power CRS or the configuration of the recommended zero power CRS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW). The method for coordinating inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates a zero-power CRS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates a non-zero-power CRS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the non-zero-power CRS configuration of the small cell to the macro base station. Information, transmitting zero-power CRS configuration information of the macro cell to the small base station. The specific mode of transmitting the macro between the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the zero-power CRS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell. The non-zero-power CRS configuration information configured by the small cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the non-zero-power CRS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station. . The manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.

由于 CRS会带来一定的开销, 为了降低小小区的 CRS的开销, 又不至 于影响后续的非服务小区测量控制的准确性, 小小区也可以在与宏小区 ZP CRS对应的 RE位置上传输数据 (data ) 或者仿制数据 (dummy ) 。 例如, 如果测量带宽所对应的 PRB上小小区有数据发送, 则正常发送数据, 否则 就发送 dummy RE; 或者在与宏小区 ZP C S对应的 RE位置上 pico总是发 送 dummy RE , dummy RE之外的 E上可以正常传输数据。 在一个大范围的无线接入网络内,还可以通过大范围的协调来提高小小 区发现的性能, 例如使多个 macro小区 (组成一个协调的发现区域)的零功 率 CRS对应的 RE对齐(宏小区间可以通过 X2接口或网管等方式传递零功 率 CRS配置信息), 从而使得 UE测到的 ZP CRS上只反映小小区的功率强 度, 这可以提高启动小小区测量的准确性。 Since the CRS brings a certain overhead, in order to reduce the CRS overhead of the small cell without affecting the accuracy of the subsequent non-serving cell measurement control, the small cell may also transmit data at the RE location corresponding to the macro cell ZP CRS. (data) or imitation data (dummy). For example, if the small cell on the PRB corresponding to the measurement bandwidth has data transmission, the data is normally sent, otherwise the dummy RE is sent; or the pico always sends the dummy RE and the dummy RE at the RE position corresponding to the macro cell ZP CS. The data can be transmitted normally on E. In a large-scale radio access network, the performance of small cell discovery can also be improved through a large-scale coordination, for example, aligning REs corresponding to zero-power CRSs of multiple macro cells (constituting a coordinated discovery area) (macro The small interval can transmit the zero-power CRS configuration information through the X2 interface or the network management system, so that the ZP CRS measured by the UE reflects only the power strength of the small cell, which can improve the accuracy of starting the small cell measurement.

另外, 小小区也可以分组, 同一组内的小小区的 CRS 时频资源对齐, 或者都与宏小区的同一个 ZP CRS配置对应。 分组的依据可以根据部署需要 而定, 例如按照地理区域进行分组, 或者按照小基站的功率大小或覆盖范围 进行分组, 或者按照 backhaul的类型分组, 或者按照小小区的 CSG (封闭 用户组, closed subscriber group ) 属性进行分组, 例如开放式 ( open mode ) 小小区, 封闭式(closed mode ) 小小区, 混合式( hybrid mode ) 小小区, 其 中开放式小小区任何用户都可以正常接入,封闭式小小区只有成员用户可以 接入, 非成员用户不能接入, 混合式小小区对于成员用户优先接入和服务, 非成员用户也可以接入。  In addition, the small cells may also be grouped, and the CRS time-frequency resources of the small cells in the same group are aligned, or both correspond to the same ZP CRS configuration of the macro cell. The basis of the grouping may be determined according to the deployment needs, for example, according to the geographical area, or according to the power level or coverage of the small base station, or grouped according to the type of backhaul, or according to the CSG of the small cell (closed subscriber group, closed subscriber Group ) attribute grouping, for example, open mode small cell, closed mode small cell, hybrid mode small cell, where any user of open small cell can access normally, closed small Only the member users can access the cell, and the non-member users cannot access the hybrid cell. The hybrid small cell preferentially accesses and services the member users, and the non-member users can also access the cell.

步驟 402: UE接收宏基站发来的测量配置信息。  Step 402: The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.

这里, 所述测量配置信息可以包括: 零功率 CRS 的配置信息 (干扰测 量资源配置信息); 所述零功率 CRS的配置信息包括零功率子帧配置信息、 零功率 CRS频域偏移量、 或者与零功率 CRS频域偏移量对应的物理小区标 识 (PCI, Physical Cell Identity ) , 零功率 CRS的配置信息还可以包括端口 数或端口号。  Here, the measurement configuration information may include: configuration information of zero-power CRS (interference measurement resource configuration information); configuration information of the zero-power CRS includes zero-power subframe configuration information, zero-power CRS frequency domain offset, or The configuration information of the zero-power CRS corresponding to the zero-power CRS frequency domain offset may also include the port number or the port number.

优选地, 所述测量配置信息还可以包括: 用于控制是否启动对非服务小 区进行测量的门限参数( threshold ) 、 以及用于过滤测量数值的参数信息 k。  Preferably, the measurement configuration information may further include: a threshold parameter (control) for controlling whether to start measurement on the non-serving cell, and parameter information k for filtering the measurement value.

宏基站为宏 UE的 ZP C S测量配置并非只能测量缺省的带宽, 宏基站 还可以配置 ZP-CRS-RS SI测量的带宽, 该配置可以采用以下方法表示, 例 如测量中心频点 +带宽 (RB个数) , RB起始索引和结束索引, RB起始索 引和 RB数, 等等。 这样, 即便宏小区与小小区不同频 (即二者的中心频点 不同) , 但只要宏小区与小小区的频谱有交叠, 则可以通过在交叠的带宽上 的测量来判断是否宏 UE靠近了异频的小小区, 从而启动对异频的小小区的 测量。 The macro base station can not only measure the default bandwidth for the ZP CS measurement configuration of the macro UE, and the macro base station can also configure the bandwidth measured by the ZP-CRS-RS SI. The configuration can be expressed by the following method, for example, measuring the center frequency + bandwidth ( RB number), RB start index and end index, RB start index and RB number, and so on. In this way, even if the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies (that is, the center frequencies of the two cells are different), as long as the spectrum of the macro cell and the small cell overlap, the bandwidth can be over the overlapping bandwidth. The measurement determines whether the macro UE is close to the small cell of the different frequency, thereby starting the measurement of the small cell of the different frequency.

所述 UE接收宏基站发来的测量配置信息可以为: UE接收所述宏基站 通过无线链路重配消息( RRCConnectionReconfiguration )发来的测量配置信 步骤 403 : UE根据所述测量配置信息, 测量零功率 CRS对应的 RE上 的干扰强度。  The receiving configuration information sent by the UE to the macro base station may be: receiving, by the UE, the measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration), step 403: the UE measures zero according to the measurement configuration information. The interference strength on the RE corresponding to the power CRS.

根据这些测量配置, 宏 UE对零功率 CRS (或干扰测量资源 )所对应的 RE (例如包括图 3中的符号 0的从上往下数的第 4个子载波对应的 RE )上 的信号的接收强度进行测量。 由于在这些 RE上宏小区为零功率, 则意味着 宏 UE在这些 RE上测到的接收信号强度代表了非服务小区的信号强度(以 图 4为例, 包括了 picol和 pico2的 CRS的信号强度 ) , 或者也可以叫 干 扰强度(对于服务小区来说, 这些非服务小区的信号就是干扰) 。 这一测量 可称 为 基于 零功 率 小 区 级参考信 号 的 接收信 号 强 度指 示 ( zero-power-CRS-based SSI, 可缩写为 ZP-CRS-RSSI ) 。  According to these measurement configurations, the macro UE receives the signal on the RE corresponding to the zero-power CRS (or interference measurement resource) (for example, the RE corresponding to the fourth sub-carrier of the symbol 0 from the top in FIG. 3) The intensity is measured. Since the macro cell has zero power on these REs, it means that the received signal strength measured by the macro UE on these REs represents the signal strength of the non-serving cell (in the example of FIG. 4, the signals of the CRS including picol and pico2 are included). Intensity), or it can also be called interference strength (for the serving cell, the signals of these non-serving cells are interference). This measurement can be referred to as the zero-power-CRS-based SSI (abbreviated as ZP-CRS-RSSI) based on the zero-power small-area reference signal.

基于 L1物理层的测量 (物理层的测量是基于所测带宽上的零功率 CRS 对应的 RE 上的总接收功率的线性平均值 ) , 宏 UE 使用公式 = (1_"Χ— 1 + " · Μ„进行层 3的过滤, 其中, α= , Μ„是来自物理层的最 Measurement based on L1 physical layer (the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the total received power on the RE corresponding to the zero-power CRS on the measured bandwidth), and the macro UE uses the formula = (1_"Χ- 1 + " · Μ „Filtering layer 3 , where α= , Μ„ is the most from the physical layer

2 4 2 4

新测量结果, F„是更新后的过滤后的测量结果, 是上一次过滤后的测量 结果。 The new measurement result, F„ is the updated filtered measurement result, which is the measurement result after the last filtration.

步骤 404: 所述 UE基于所述 RE上第一下行信号的干扰强度, 确定是 否开启对非服务小区的测量, 若开启, 则执行步骤 405; 否则, 结束处理流 程。  Step 404: The UE determines, according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, perform step 405; otherwise, end the processing process.

具体来说,如果 ZP-CRS-RSSI>=threshold(或者 ZP-CRS-RSSI>threshold 也可以) , 则宏 UE启动对非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 否则宏 UE可 以不测量同频和异频的非服务小区或小小区(也可以是其他制式的非服务小 区, 或小小区) 。 以图 4为例, 宏 UE0由于离 picol和 pico2都比较远, 测 得的 ZP-CRS-RSSI可能会低于 threshold, 因此不会启动对非服务小区 (或 小小区)的测量(小小区的测量配置可能与非服务小区的测量配置相同, 也 可能不同) ; 而宏 UE1 和宏 UE2 由于分别靠近 picol 和 pico2 , 测到的 ZP-CRS-RSSI由于包括了 pico的 CRS的功率 (也就是干扰强度) , 会相对 较高, 并且随着它们各自靠近 picol 和 pico2, 会趋向于增大, 当它们各自 测到的 ZP-CRS-RSSI大于 threshold时, UE1、 UE2各自就会启动对非服务 小区 (或小小区)的测量, 从而通过小区搜索发现并识别非服务小区或小小 区 (即图中的 picol或 pico2 ) 。 Specifically, if ZP-CRS-RSSI>=threshold (or ZP-CRS-RSSI>threshold is also possible), the macro UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell), otherwise the macro UE may not measure the same frequency. And non-serving cells or small cells with different frequencies (may also be non-service small in other systems) District, or small community). Taking Figure 4 as an example, the macro UE0 is far away from picol and pico2, and the measured ZP-CRS-RSSI may be lower than the threshold, so the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be initiated (small cell The measurement configuration may be the same as or different from the measurement configuration of the non-serving cell; and the macro UE1 and macro UE2 are close to picol and pico2, respectively, and the detected ZP-CRS-RSSI is due to the power of the CRS including the pico (that is, the interference strength). ), will be relatively high, and tend to increase as they are close to picol and pico2, respectively, when their respective measured ZP-CRS-RSSI is greater than threshold, UE1, UE2 will each initiate a non-serving cell Measurement of (or small cell), thereby discovering and identifying a non-serving cell or a small cell (i.e., picol or pico2 in the figure) through cell search.

以上基于 ZP-CRS-RSSI 的测量反映的是非服务小区的接收信号强度, 考虑到在无线资源管理中通常用于决策的是服务小区与相邻小区的信号强 度 的 相 对 值 ( 例 如 切 换 判 决 中 ) , 因 此 还 可 以 定 义 RS Q*=RS P/ZP-CRS- SSI, 其中 RSRQ*为新定义的参考信号接收质量, RSRP为小区级参考信号接收功率 (在非零功率 CRS所对应的 RE上测量, 物理层的测量是基于所测带宽上的 CRS对应的 RE上的 CRS的功率贡献的 线性平均值) 。 可以看出, UE计算的 RSRQ*为 UE在不同的 RE上测得的 RSRP和 ZP-CRS-RSSI的比值。这个值反映了服务小区的信号功率与非服务 小区的信号强度的比值, 因此, 既能反映 UE是否远离服务的宏小区, 也能 反映 UE是否靠近小小区。 因此, UE也可以基于上述定义的 RSRQ*的测量 来控制对非服务小区的测量。 例如, 当 RSRQ*低于基站配置的门限时, UE 启动对非服务小区的测量, 否则 UE可以不测量非服务小区。  The above measurement based on ZP-CRS-RSSI reflects the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, considering that the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell is usually used for decision making in radio resource management (for example, in handover decision) Therefore, it is also possible to define RS Q*=RS P/ZP-CRS- SSI, where RSRQ* is the newly defined reference signal reception quality, and RSRP is the cell-level reference signal reception power (measured on the RE corresponding to the non-zero power CRS) The measurement of the physical layer is based on a linear average of the power contribution of the CRS on the RE corresponding to the CRS on the measured bandwidth). It can be seen that the RSRQ* calculated by the UE is the ratio of the RSRP and the ZP-CRS-RSSI measured by the UE on different REs. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the signal strength of the non-serving cell. Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the measurement of the RSRQ* defined above. For example, when the RSRQ* is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell.

另外,上面的判定条件是使用测量值与门限值的大小比较作为判定依据 (或者判断依据之一) 的, 这种方法可称为强度判定法。 此外, 也可以考虑 根据测量值的增量作为启动同频 /异频测量的判别条件 (之一),这种方法称为 增量判定法。 根据 ZP-CSI-RSSI或 CSI-RSRQ在一定时间内的增量: 测得 ZP-CSI-RSSI 增大意味着非服务小区信号 (或干扰信号) 强度增强, 如果 ZP-CSI-RSSI持续增强, 可能说明距离另一个小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动 测量; 或者, CSI-RSRQ的减小意味着干扰强度增加和 /或服务小区信号强度 减小, 如果 CSI-RSRQ持续减小, 可能说明距离服务小区越来越远, 而距离 相邻小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动测量。 增量判定法和强度判定法也可以联 合起来判别是否启动非服务小区或小小区测量。 In addition, the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method. In addition, it is also conceivable to use the increment of the measured value as one of the discriminating conditions for starting the intra-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called an incremental decision method. According to the increment of ZP-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ within a certain time: The measured increase of ZP-CSI-RSSI means that the strength of the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced, if the ZP-CSI-RSSI continues to enhance, May indicate that it is getting closer and closer to another cell, you can consider starting Measurement; or, the decrease of CSI-RSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the serving cell signal strength decreases. If the CSI-RSRQ continues to decrease, it may indicate that the distance from the serving cell is getting farther and farther, and the distance from the neighboring cell is coming. The closer you are, the more you can consider starting the measurement. The incremental decision method and the strength determination method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.

通常小小区发现的启动并不需要独自启动,小小区发现可以在非服务小 区测量之中进行, 而对非服务小区的测量不仅需要考虑小小区发现的需要, 也需要考虑在宏小区间的 UE移动性(例如切换) 的需要, 为此, 可以采用 联合判定准则, 即将 ZP-CRS-RSSI或, RSRQ*的测量与, RSRP (基于 CRS 的) , RSRQ, 或基于 CSI-RSRP的测量中的至少两个联合起来控制对同频 / 异频非服务小 区 ( 相邻小 区 ) 的测量。 例如, 方式 1: 如果 ZP-C S-RS SI>threshold , 或 RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务 小区的测量; 方式 2: 当 ZP-CRS-RSSI>threshold, 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基 站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 3 : 如果 RSRQ*<thresholdl, 或 RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 4: 如 果 RSRQ*<thresholdl , 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服 务小区的测量。 如果测量的启动只针对小小区发现, 也可以将 ZP-CRS-RS SI 或, RSRQ*的测量与, RSRP (基于 CRS的) , RSRQ或基于 CSI-RSRP的 测量中的至少两个联合起来控制对小小区的测量, 具体来说例子, 将上面的 4种方式中的条件判断的 "或" 关系改成 "且" 关系就可以了。 用单个条件的判断准则, 在单个条件的判断准则满足时再执行联合判定准 贝 |J, 具体的例子如下: 首先或缺省釆用基于 CRS的 RSRP的判定准则, 当 基于 CRS测量值 RSRP小于预定义的或基站配置的门限值时, 再执行联合 判定准则以通过新的测量 (例如 ZP-CRS-RSSI或 RSRQ*的测量) 来确定是 否启动同频或异频测量。 又例如, 特定传输模式下的 UE使用联合判定准则 进行测量控制。 基站也可以显示地或隐含地通过信令指示 UE执行联合判定 准则, 这些信令包括 adio Resource Control ( RRC ) 层 IE, MAC层控制元 control element, 物理层下行控制信息 ( downlink control information, 缩写 为 DCI ) 。 Generally, the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone, and small cell discovery can be performed in non-serving cell measurement, while the measurement of non-serving cells needs to consider not only the needs of small cell discovery but also the UE between macro cells. The need for mobility (eg, handover), for which a joint decision criterion, ie, measurement of ZP-CRS-RSSI or RSRQ*, RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, or CSI-RSRP-based measurements, may be employed. At least two jointly control the measurement of the co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell (adjacent cell). For example, mode 1: If the ZP-C S-RS SI>threshold, or the RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 2: When ZP-CRS-RSSI>threshold, or CSI-RSRP If the threshold is less than the configuration of a certain base station, start the measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 3: If RSRQ*<threshold1, or the RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start the measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 4: If RSRQ*< Threshold1, or CSI-RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, and starts measurement of the non-serving cell. If the start of the measurement is only for small cell discovery, it is also possible to combine the measurement of ZP-CRS-RS SI or RSRQ* with at least two of RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ or CSI-RSRP-based measurements. For the measurement of the small cell, specifically, the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four methods is changed to the "and" relationship. Using a single conditional criterion, the joint decision criterion is performed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied. The specific example is as follows: First or default, the CRS-based RSRP criterion is used, when the RSRS measurement value is smaller than the RSRP. When a predefined or base station configured threshold is used, a joint decision criterion is then performed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement, such as a ZP-CRS-RSSI or RSRQ* measurement. As another example, UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control. The base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including adio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element. Control element, downlink control information (abbreviated as DCI).

步驟 405: UE开启对非服务小区的测量。  Step 405: The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.

具体启动对非服务小区 (或小小区)的测量的方式至少有以下两种: 方 式一, 服务基站已经为 UE配置了非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 但该测 量需要等待 UE对具体条件的判定才能启动; 方式二, UE在判定满足 (基 站配置的)上报条件后向服务基站报告测量结果或发送特定的指示(例如强 干扰指示) , 基站根据测量结果或特定的指示(例如强干扰指示)进行非服 务小区 (或小小区) 的测量配置 (和 /或测量的启动) 。 这样, 可以使得宏 UE只有在靠近小小区的局部区域才执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 在远 离小小区的大部分区域内都不需要执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 从而 既减少了由于测量导致的耗电和计算开销,也能够及时的发现小小区并通过 切换 /分流到小小区或以小小区作为辅载波来提升服务质量 (包括呑吐量) , 减少宏小区的负荷。 实施例三、  The method for specifically starting the measurement of the non-serving cell (or the small cell) is as follows: In the first mode, the serving base station has configured the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to specifically The determination of the condition can be started. In the second mode, the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (such as a strong interference indication) after determining that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, and the base station according to the measurement result or a specific indication (for example, strong) Interference indication) Perform measurement configuration (and/or start of measurement) of a non-serving cell (or small cell). In this way, the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect the small cell in time and improve the quality of service (including the throughput) by switching/diverting to the small cell or using the small cell as the secondary carrier to reduce the load of the macro cell. . Embodiment 3

图 6是有宏小区 (图中的 macro )和小小区 (图中的 icol和 pico2 )共 存的示意图。 图中可见, macro有较大的覆盖范围, picol和 pico2的覆盖范 围较小(由于其传输功率较小)。 由于宏小区和小小区覆盖范围的巨大差别, 宏用户设备(macro UE )如果在任何地点都持续对非服务小区(也包括小小 区)进行测量, 会导致较大的用户设备耗电和计算开销, 因此需要有一个比 较省电的方法, 来判断宏用户设备是否靠近了小小区, 从而启动对包括小小 区在内的非服务小区的测量。  Fig. 6 is a diagram showing the coexistence of a macro cell (macro in the figure) and a small cell (icol and pico2 in the figure). As can be seen, the macro has a larger coverage, and the coverage of picol and pico2 is smaller (due to its smaller transmission power). Due to the huge difference in the coverage of the macro cell and the small cell, the macro UE continuously measures the non-serving cell (including the small cell) at any place, which results in a large user equipment power consumption and computational overhead. Therefore, it is necessary to have a more power-saving method to determine whether the macro user equipment is close to the small cell, thereby starting measurement of the non-serving cell including the small cell.

在图 6中, 每个传输节点 (的子帧 0, 也可以是子帧 5 ) 都有一个下 行资源块 ( resource block , 缩写为 RB ) 被显示出来, 资源块 RB由一系列 的资源单元 RE组成, 每个 RE由 (k, 1 ) 二维坐标表示, 其中 k代表频域 的子载波( subcarrier ) 索引, 1代表时域的符号索引。 针对 macro节点, 当 1=5时, 12个 RE上 7 载的是零功率辅同步序列 ( secondary synchronization signal, 缩写为 SSS ); 1=6时, 12个 RE上承载的是零功率主同步序歹 !j ( primary synchronization signal, 缩写为 PSS )。再看 icol和 ico2, 可以发现, 当 1=5 时, 12 个 RE 上 7 载的是非零功率辅同步序列 (secondary synchronization signal, 缩写为 SSS ) 的一部分; 1=6时, 12个 RE上承载的是非零功率主同 步序列 ( rimary synchronization signal, 缩写为 PSS ) 。 也就是说, macro的 零功率 PSS/SSS的 RE位置对应的是 picol和 pico2的非零功率 PSS/SSS的 位置。 In FIG. 6, each transmission node (subframe 0, or subframe 5) has a downlink resource block (abbreviated as RB), and the resource block RB is composed of a series of resource units RE. Composition, each RE is represented by (k, 1) two-dimensional coordinates, where k represents the subcarrier index of the frequency domain, and 1 represents the symbol index of the time domain. For the macro node, when When 1=5, 7 of the 12 REs are zero-power secondary synchronization (synchronous signal, abbreviated as SSS); when 1=6, 12 REs carry zero-power primary synchronization sequence! j ( primary Synchronization signal, abbreviated as PSS). Looking at ico and ico2, it can be found that when 1=5, 7 of the 12 REs are part of the secondary synchronization signal (SSS); when 1=6, the 12 REs are carried. Is the rimary synchronization signal (abbreviated as PSS). That is, the RE position of the macro's zero-power PSS/SSS corresponds to the position of the non-zero power PSS/SSS of picol and pico2.

步骤 501: Macro Cell与小小区之间进行资源协调。  Step 501: Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.

这里, 所述步驟 501为可选步骤; 具体的, 通过 X2接口, S1接口, 或 通过 OAM甚至 UE (不限于需要进行小小区发现的 UE ) 进行。 以 X2接口 的协调为例,宏小区可以通过 X2 Setu 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update 流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接或间接(通过 X2网关 或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向小小区指示宏小区的零功率 SS的配置信 息(宏小区还可以通过 handover preparation流程消息中携带的基站间的 RRC 信息例如 AS-Config将宏小区的零功率 SS的配置信息通知小小区) , 或者 宏小区通过上述 X2消息向小小区推荐 (小小区的) 非零功率 SS的配置信 息, 小小区接收到该配置信息后即可以对其自身的非零功率 SS进行配置, 以完成小区间的协调。 反过来, 小小区也可以通过 X2 Setu 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向宏小区指示其非零 功率 SS的配置, 宏小区于是通过空口为 UE配置相应的零功率 SS测量。 通 过 S1 接口或者其它接口协调小区间的配置的方法包括, 宏基站通过 MME 和 /或网关 (gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向对方基站传递零功率 SS 的配置或者推荐非零功率 SS 的配置, 和 /或, 小基站通过 MME和 /或网关 ( gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向宏基站传递非零功率 SS的配置或者 推荐零功率 SS的配置。 通过网管系统协调小区间的配置的方法包括, 网管 系统向宏基站指示零功率 SS配置, 网管系统向小基站指示非零功率 SS配 置; 或者网管系统向宏基站发送小小区的非零功率 SS配置信息, 向小基站 发送宏小区的零功率 SS配置信息。 通过 UE传递 macro和小小区间的配置 具体方式包括,宏 UE在切换到小小区后将之前宏小区为其配置的零功率 SS 配置信息发送给小小区, 或者, 小小区切换到宏小区后将之前小小区为其配 置的非零功率 SS配置信息发送给宏小区, 或者, 宏基站让 UE通过测量过 程接收小小区的系统信息, 其中包括非零功率 SS配置信息, 并由 UE上报 给宏基站。通过 UE上报的相邻小区配置信息的方式也可以称为自组织 /自优 -f- 网络技术 ( self-organizing/self-optimization network ) 。 Here, the step 501 is an optional step; specifically, through an X2 interface, an S1 interface, or through an OAM or even a UE (not limited to a UE that needs to perform small cell discovery). Taking the coordination of the X2 interface as an example, the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to the small cell through the X2 Setu flow message, the ENB Configuration Update flow message, or the X2 message such as the Load Information message. The configuration information of the zero-power SS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the zero-power SS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell passes the above The X2 message recommends the configuration information of the non-zero power SS (small cell) to the small cell. After receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own non-zero power SS to complete the coordination between the cells. In turn, the small cell can also indicate its non-zero power SS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setu flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message. The configuration, the macro cell then configures the corresponding zero-power SS measurement for the UE through the air interface. The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes the macro base station transmitting a zero-power SS configuration or recommending a non-zero-power SS configuration to the opposite base station through the MME and/or a gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW). And/or, the small base station transmits the configuration of the non-zero power SS or the configuration of the recommended zero power SS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW). A method for coordinating inter-cell configuration through a network management system includes: The system indicates a zero-power SS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates a non-zero-power SS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the non-zero-power SS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the zero-power SS configuration of the macro cell to the small base station. information. The specific mode of transmitting the macro between the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the zero-power SS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell. The non-zero-power SS configuration information configured by the small cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the non-zero-power SS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station. . The manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.

在一个大范围的无线接入网络内,还可以通过大范围的协调来提高小小 区发现的性能, 例如使多个 macro小区(组成一个协调的发现区域)的零功 率 PSS/SSS对应的 RE对齐 (宏小区间可以通过 X2接口或网管等方式传递 零功率 PSS/SSS配置信息 ) , 从而使得 UE测到的 ZP SS-RSSI只反映小小 区的功率强度, 这可以提高启动小小区测量的准确性。  In a large-scale radio access network, the performance of small cell discovery can also be improved through a wide range of coordination, for example, aligning REs corresponding to zero-power PSS/SSS of multiple macro cells (constituting a coordinated discovery area) (The zero-power PSS/SSS configuration information can be transmitted between the macro cells through the X2 interface or the network management system, etc.), so that the ZP SS-RSSI measured by the UE only reflects the power strength of the small cell, which can improve the accuracy of starting the small cell measurement. .

步驟 502: UE接收宏基站发来的测量配置信息。  Step 502: The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.

宏基站首先为宏 UE进行测量配置, 在测量配置信息中包括零功率 SS 的配置信息 (干扰测量资源配置信息) , 零功率 SS的配置信息包括零功率 子帧配置信息。 (零功率 PSS/SSS只要间隔较大, 例如每 10帧即 100ms或 者更大的间隔才出现一次零功率 PSS/SSS, 则零功率 PSS/SSS对其它 UE的 影响就不大。 其它方法也可以减小对其它 UE的影响, 例如可以使 PSS/SSS 的零功率交替出现, 比如零功率 PSS在系统帧号模 10等于 0的时候出现, 而零功率 SSS在系统帧号模 10等于 5的时候出现, 还可以使零功率 PSS和 零功率 SSS不同时配置, 例如仅配置零功率 PSS, 且每 100ms 出现一次。 当只配置了零功率 PSS或零功率 SSS时, UE相应的只测量零功率的同步信 号对应的 RE上的信号强度)测量配置信息中还包括用于控制是否启动对非 月良务小区进行测量的门限参数(threshold ) 。 测量配置信息中还可以包括用 于过滤测量数值的参数信息 k。 宏基站为宏 UE 的 ZP PSS/SSS 测量配置并非只能测量缺省的带宽 (PSS/SSS的缺省带宽为中心 6个 RB),当小小区的中心频点与宏基站不同时, 宏基站还可以配置 ZP-SS-RSSI测量的中心频点, 以使 ZP-SS-RSSI测量的 RB为小小区的中心 6个 RB (宏基站可以通过 X2接口知道小小区的中心频 点) 。 这样, 即便宏小区与小小区不同频 (即二者的中心频点不同) , 但只 要宏小区与小小区的频谱有交叠,则可以通过在交叠的带宽上的测量来判断 是否宏 UE靠近了异频的小小区, 从而启动对异频的小小区的测量。 The macro base station first performs measurement configuration for the macro UE, and includes configuration information of the zero power SS (interference measurement resource configuration information) in the measurement configuration information, and configuration information of the zero power SS includes zero power subframe configuration information. (The zero-power PSS/SSS has a small interval, for example, a zero-power PSS/SSS occurs every 10 frames, that is, 100 ms or more, and the zero-power PSS/SSS has little effect on other UEs. Other methods can also To reduce the impact on other UEs, for example, zero power of PSS/SSS can be alternately generated, for example, zero-power PSS occurs when system frame number modulo 10 is equal to 0, and zero-power SSS is when system frame number modulo 10 is equal to 5. When present, zero-power PSS and zero-power SSS can also be configured at different times, for example, only zero-power PSS is configured, and once every 100 ms. When only zero-power PSS or zero-power SSS is configured, the UE only measures zero-power. The signal strength measurement information on the RE corresponding to the synchronization signal further includes a threshold parameter (threshold) for controlling whether to start measurement on the non-monthly service cell. The measurement configuration information may also include parameter information k for filtering the measured values. The macro base station is configured to measure the ZP PSS/SSS measurement of the macro UE. The default bandwidth of the PSS/SSS is 6 RBs. When the center frequency of the small cell is different from that of the macro base station, the macro base station The center frequency of the ZP-SS-RSSI measurement can also be configured so that the RB measured by the ZP-SS-RSSI is the center 6 RBs of the small cell (the macro base station can know the center frequency of the small cell through the X2 interface). In this way, even if the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies (that is, the center frequency points of the two are different), as long as the spectrum of the macro cell and the small cell overlap, the macro UE can be determined by measurement on the overlapping bandwidth. Close to the small cell of the different frequency, thereby starting the measurement of the small cell with different frequency.

宏 UE 接 收 宏 基 站 的 无 线 链 路 重 配 消 息 ( RRCConnection econfiguration ) , 其中包括上述测量配置信息。  The macro UE receives the radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnection econfiguration) of the macro base station, and includes the above measurement configuration information.

步骤 503: UE根据所述测量配置信息, 测量零功率 PSS/SSS对应的 RE 上的干扰强度。  Step 503: The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the zero power PSS/SSS according to the measurement configuration information.

根据这些测量配置, 宏 UE对零功率 PSS/SSS (或干扰测量资源) 所对 应的 RE (例如包括图 6中的符号 5符号 6 ) 上的信号的接收强度进行测量。 由于在这些 RE上宏小区为零功率, 则意味着宏 UE在这些 RE上测到的接 收信号强度代表了非服务小区的信号强度(以图 6为例,包括了 picol和 pico2 的 PSS/SSS的信号强度) , 或者也可以叫做干扰强度 (对于服务小区来说, 这些非服务小区的信号就是干扰)。 这一测量可称为基于零功率同步信号的 接收信号强度指示 ( zero-power-SS-based RSSI, 可缩写为 ZP SS-RSSI ) 。 基于 L1 物理层的测量 (物理层的测量是基于所测带宽上的零功率 SS对应 的 RE上的总接收功率的线性平均值), 宏 UE使用公式 F« = 0 _ ") · 进行层 3的过滤, 其中, α , Μ„是来自物理层的最新测量结果, F„是更

Figure imgf000025_0001
Based on these measurement configurations, the macro UE measures the received strength of the signal on the RE corresponding to the zero power PSS/SSS (or interference measurement resource) (eg, including symbol 5 symbol 6 in Figure 6). Since the macro cell has zero power on these REs, it means that the received signal strength measured by the macro UE on these REs represents the signal strength of the non-serving cell (for example, in Figure 6, the PSS/SSS including picol and pico2) The signal strength), or it can also be called the interference strength (for the serving cell, the signals of these non-serving cells are interference). This measurement can be referred to as a zero-power-SS-based RSSI (abbreviated as ZP SS-RSSI). Measurement based on the L1 physical layer (the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the total received power on the RE corresponding to the zero power SS over the measured bandwidth), the macro UE uses the formula F « = 0 _ ") · Layer 3 Filtration, where α, Μ„ is the latest measurement from the physical layer, F„ is more
Figure imgf000025_0001

新后的过滤后的测量结果, 是上一次过滤后的测量结果。 The filtered result after the new filter is the result of the last filter.

步驟 504: 所述 UE基于所述 RE上第一下行信号的干扰强度, 确定是 否开启对非服务小区的测量, 若开启, 则执行步驟 505; 否则, 结束处理流 程。  Step 504: The UE determines, according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, perform step 505; otherwise, end the processing process.

基于过滤后的 ZP-SS-RSSI,宏 UE控制对非服务小区的测量。具体来说, 如果 ZP-SS- SSI>=threshold (或者 ZP-SS- SSI>threshold 也可以) , 则宏 UE启动对非服务小区 (或小小区 ) 的测量, 否则宏 UE可以不测量同频和 异频的非服务小区或小小区(也可以是其他制式的非服务小区,或小小区)。 以图 6为例, 宏 UE0由于离 picol和 pico2都比较远, 测得的 ZP-SS-RSSI 可能会低于 threshold, 因此不会启动对非服务小区 (或小小区 ) 的测量(小 小区的测量配置可能与非服务小区的测量配置相同, 也可能不同 ) ; 而宏 UE1和宏 UE2由于分别靠近 picol和 pico2 ,测到的 ZP-SS-RSSI由于包括了 pico的 PSS/SSS的功率(也就是干扰强度) , 会相对较高, 并且随着它们各 自靠近 picol和 pico2, 会趋向于增大, 当它们各自测到的 ZP-SS-RSSI大于 threshold时, UE1、 UE2各自就会启动对非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 从而通过小区搜索发现并识别非服务小区或小小区 (即图中的 picol 或 pico2 ) 。 Based on the filtered ZP-SS-RSSI, the macro UE controls the measurement of the non-serving cell. Specifically, If ZP-SS-SSI>=threshold (or ZP-SS-SSI>threshold is also possible), the macro UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell), otherwise the macro UE may not measure the same frequency and different frequency. A non-serving cell or a small cell (may also be a non-serving cell of another standard, or a small cell). Taking Figure 6 as an example, the macro UE0 is far away from picol and pico2, and the measured ZP-SS-RSSI may be lower than the threshold, so the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be started (small cell The measurement configuration may be the same as or different from the measurement configuration of the non-serving cell; while the macro UE1 and macro UE2 are close to picol and pico2, respectively, and the measured ZP-SS-RSSI includes the power of the PSO/SSS including the pico (ie The interference strength) will be relatively high, and will tend to increase as they are close to picol and pico2. When their respective measured ZP-SS-RSSI is greater than threshold, UE1 and UE2 will each start the right Measurement of a serving cell (or small cell) to discover and identify a non-serving cell or a small cell (i.e., picol or pico2 in the figure) through cell search.

以上基于 ZP-SS-RSSI的测量反映的是非服务小区的接收信号强度 (即 干扰强度), 考虑到在无线资源管理中通常用于决策的是服务小区与相邻小 区的信号强度的相对值 ( 例如切换判决中 ) , 因此还可以定义 The above measurement based on ZP-SS-RSSI reflects the received signal strength (ie, the interference strength) of the non-serving cell, and it is considered that the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell is usually used for decision making in radio resource management ( For example, switching the decision), so it can also be defined

SSRQ=SSRP/ZP-SS-RSSI,其中 SSRQ( synchronization signal received quality ) 为新定义的同步信号接收盾量, SSRP ( synchronization signal received power ) 为同步信号接收功率(在非零功率 PSS/SSS所对应的 RE上测量, 物理层的 测量是基于所测带宽上的 SS对应的 RE上的同步信号功率贡献的线性平均 值) 。 可以看出 , UE计算的 SSRQ为 UE在不同的 RE上测得的 SSRP和 ZP-SS-RSSI 的比值。 这个值反映了服务小区的信号功率与非服务小区的信 号强度的比值, 因此, 既能反映 UE是否远离服务的宏小区, 也能反映 UE 是否靠近小小区。 因此, UE也可以基于上述定义的 SSRQ的测量来控制对 非服务小区的测量。 例如, 当 SSRQ低于基站配置的门限时, UE启动对非 服务小区的测量, 否则 UE可以不测量非服务小区。 SSRQ=SSRP/ZP-SS-RSSI, where SSRQ (synchronization signal received quality) is the newly defined synchronization signal receiving shield, SSRP (synchronization signal received power) is the synchronization signal receiving power (corresponding to non-zero power PSS/SSS) On the RE measurement, the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the power contribution of the synchronization signal on the RE corresponding to the SS over the measured bandwidth). It can be seen that the SSRQ calculated by the UE is the ratio of the SSRP and the ZP-SS-RSSI measured by the UE on different REs. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the signal strength of the non-serving cell. Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the measurement of the SSRQ defined above. For example, when the SSRQ is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell.

另夕卜,上面的判定条件是使用测量值与门限值的大小比较作为判定依据 (或者判断依据之一) 的, 这种方法可称为强度判定法。 此外, 也可以考虑 根据测量值的增量作为启动同频 /异频测量的判别条件 (之一),这种方法称为 增量判定法。 根据 ZP-SS-RSSI或 SSRQ在一定时间内的增量 (变化量 ) : 测得 ZP-SS-RSSI 增大意味着非服务小区信号 (或干扰) 强度增强, 如果 ZP-SS-RSSI 持续增强, 可能说明距离另一个小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动 测量;或者, SSRQ的减小意味着干扰强度增加和 /或服务小区信号强度减小, 如果 SSRQ持续减小, 可能说明距离服务小区越来越远, 而距离相邻小区越 来越近, 可以考虑启动测量。 增量判定法和强度判定法也可以联合起来判别 是否启动非服务小区或小小区测量。 In addition, the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method. In addition, you can also consider According to the increment of the measured value, as one of the discriminating conditions for starting the same-frequency/inter-frequency measurement, this method is called an incremental decision method. Incremental (variation) according to ZP-SS-RSSI or SSRQ within a certain time: The measured ZP-SS-RSSI increase means that the non-serving cell signal (or interference) strength is enhanced, if ZP-SS-RSSI is continuously enhanced , may indicate that it is getting closer to another cell, and may consider starting the measurement; or, the decrease of SSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the signal strength of the serving cell decreases. If the SSRQ continues to decrease, it may indicate that the distance from the serving cell is more The farther it is, and the closer it is to the neighboring cell, the start of the measurement can be considered. The incremental decision method and the strength determination method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.

通常小小区发现的启动并不需要独自启动,小小区发现可以在非服务小 区测量之中进行, 而对非服务小区的测量不仅需要考虑小小区发现的需要, 也需要考虑在宏小区间的 UE移动性 (例如切换) 的需要, 为此, 可以采用 判定准则, 即将 ZP-SS-RSSI或, SSRQ的测量与 RSRP (基于 CRS的) , RS Q 或 SSRP 的测量中的至少两个联合起来控制对同频 /异频非服务小区 (相邻小区) 的测量。 例如, 方式 1 : 如果 ZP-SS-RSSI>threshold, 或 RSRP 小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 2 : 当 ZP-SS-RSSI>threshold, 或 SSRP小于某一门限(可能由基站配置), 启动对 非服务小区的测量; 方式 3: 如果 SSRQ<thresholdl , 或 RSRP小于某一基站 配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 4: 如果 SSRQ<thresholdl, 或 SSRP小于某一门限 (可能由基站配置) , 启动对非服务小区的测量。 如果 测量的启动只针对小小区发现, 也可以将 ZP-SS-RSSI 或 SSRQ 的测量与 RSRP (基于 CRS的)或, RSRQ, SSRP的测量联合起来控制对小小区的测 量, 具体的例子将上面的 4种方式中的条件判断的 "或" 关系改成 "且" 关 系就可以了。  Generally, the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone, and small cell discovery can be performed in non-serving cell measurement, while the measurement of non-serving cells needs to consider not only the needs of small cell discovery but also the UE between macro cells. The need for mobility (such as handover), for which a decision criterion can be used, that is, the measurement of ZP-SS-RSSI or SSRQ is combined with at least two of RSRP (CRS-based), RS Q or SSRP measurements. Measurement of co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cells (adjacent cells). For example, mode 1: If ZP-SS-RSSI>threshold, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 2: When ZP-SS-RSSI>threshold, or SSRP is less than a certain threshold (may be configured by the base station), initiate measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 3: If SSRQ<thresholdl, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 4: If SSRQ<thresholdl, or The SSRP is less than a certain threshold (possibly configured by the base station) to initiate measurements on non-serving cells. If the measurement is initiated only for small cell discovery, the measurement of ZP-SS-RSSI or SSRQ can also be combined with RSRP (CRS-based) or RSRQ, SSRP measurements to control the measurement of small cells. The specific example will be In the four ways, the "or" relationship of the conditional judgment is changed to the "and" relationship.

上述判定准则可以在特定的条件下执行, 例如, 可以首先或缺省采用单 个条件的判断准则, 在单个条件的判断准则满足时再执行联合判定准则, 具 体的例子如下:首先或缺省釆用基于 CRS的 RSRP的判定准则, 当基于 CRS 测量值 RSRP小于预定义的或基站配置的门限值时, 再执行联合判定准则以 通过新的测量 (例如 ZP-SS-RSSI或 SSRQ的测量) 来确定是否启动同频或 异频测量。又例如,特定传输模式下的 UE使用联合判定准则进行测量控制。 基站也可以显示地或隐含地通过信令指示 UE执行联合判定准则, 这些信令 包括 Radio Resource Control ( RRC ) 层 IE, MAC层控制元 control element, 物理层下行控制信息 ( downlink control information, 缩写为 DCI ) 。 The above criterion can be executed under specific conditions. For example, the criterion of a single condition can be used first or by default, and the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied. The specific example is as follows: first or default CRS-based RSRP decision criterion, when the CRS measurement value RSRP is less than a predefined or base station configured threshold, then the joint determination criterion is executed Whether a co-frequency or inter-frequency measurement is initiated is determined by a new measurement, such as a ZP-SS-RSSI or SSRQ measurement. As another example, UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control. The base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).

步骤 505: UE开启对非服务小区的测量。  Step 505: The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.

具体启动对非服务小区 (或小小区)的测量的方式至少有以下两种: 方 式一, 服务基站已经为 UE配置了非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 但该测 量需要等待 UE对具体条件的判定才能启动; 方式二, UE在判定满足 (基 站配置的)上报条件后向服务基站报告测量结果或强干扰指示, 基站根据测 量结果或强干扰指示进行非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量配置 (和 /或测量 的启动) 。 这样, 可以使得宏 UE只有在靠近小小区的局部区域才执行对非 服务小区 /小小区的测量, 在远离小小区的大部分区域内都不需要执行对非 服务小区 /小小区的测量, 从而既减少了由于测量导致的耗电和计算开销, 也能够及时的发现小小区并通过切换 /分流到小小区或以小小区作为辅载波 来提升服务质量 (包括呑吐量) , 减少宏小区的负荷。  The method for specifically starting the measurement of the non-serving cell (or the small cell) is as follows: In the first mode, the serving base station has configured the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to specifically The determining of the condition can be started. In the second manner, the UE reports the measurement result or the strong interference indication to the serving base station after determining that the reporting condition is met (the configuration of the base station), and the base station performs the non-serving cell (or small cell) according to the measurement result or the strong interference indication. Measurement configuration (and / or measurement startup). In this way, the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect the small cell in time and improve the quality of service (including the throughput) by switching/diverting to the small cell or using the small cell as the secondary carrier to reduce the load of the macro cell. .

优选地, 基于发现信号的方法与基于同步信号的方法比较类似, 主要区 别在于发现信号与同步信号的信号图样, 发送周期, 带宽等细节上, 宏基站 也需要发送零功率发现信号的配置信息给宏 UE,可能包括发现信号的周期, 时间偏移, 带宽等信息, 基本的流程与基于同步信号的流程类似, 在此不再 赘述。 实施例四、  Preferably, the method based on the discovery signal is similar to the method based on the synchronization signal. The main difference lies in the details of the signal pattern, the transmission period, the bandwidth of the discovery signal and the synchronization signal, and the macro base station also needs to send the configuration information of the zero power discovery signal to The macro UE may include information such as the period of the discovery signal, the time offset, and the bandwidth. The basic process is similar to the process based on the synchronization signal, and details are not described herein again. Embodiment 4

步骤 601: Macro Cell与小小区之间进行资源协调。  Step 601: Resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.

这里, 步骤 601为可选步骤; 具体包括:  Here, step 601 is an optional step; specifically includes:

在宏小区和小小区共存的场景中, 如果宏小区与小小区同频(中心频点 相同) 并且半帧边界对齐, 宏小区的 PSS/SSS与小小区的 PSS/SSS 的时频 资源是对齐的, 则宏 UE测量到的干扰强度包括了小小区的同步信号功率, 而如果二者不同频或者半帧边界不对齐, 则宏小区的 PSS/SSS所占 RE可能 对应的是小小区的其它下行信号(例如数据区域) , 为了保证测量的准确性 以及小小区的发现不受其负荷影响(即便在小小区低负荷或者无负荷时也可 以发现小小区), 最好通过某种方法让小小区在与宏小区的 PSS/SSS对应的 RE (由于 PSS/SSS在系统带宽的中心 6个 RB上传输, 因此也可以说 RB ) 上有下行信号发送, 例如小小区可以在与宏小区的 PSS/SSS对应的 6个 RB 上传输下行数据(通过相应的调度可以达到) , 或者还可以传输第二下行同 步信号(有别于按照系统缺省配置传输的下行同步信号)。 宏小区与小小区 之间可以通过协调令小小区获知宏小区的 PSS/SSS对应的 B, 这样的协调 可以通过 X2接口, S1接口, 或通过 OAM甚至 UE (不限于需要进行小小 区发现的 UE ) 进行。 In the scenario where the macro cell and the small cell coexist, if the macro cell and the small cell have the same frequency (the same center frequency point) and the field boundary is aligned, the PSS/SSS of the macro cell and the time frequency of the PSS/SSS of the small cell The resources are aligned, and the interference strength measured by the macro UE includes the synchronization signal power of the small cell, and if the two frequencies are different or the field boundaries are not aligned, the PSS/SSS occupied by the macro cell may correspond to a small RE. Other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by its load (even if the small cell can be found when the small cell is under load or no load), it is better to pass some kind of The method allows the small cell to have a downlink signal transmission on the RE corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the macro cell (since the PSS/SSS is transmitted on the center 6 RBs of the system bandwidth, so RB can also be said), for example, the small cell can be in the macro The downlink data is transmitted on the 6 RBs corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the cell (which can be achieved by corresponding scheduling), or the second downlink synchronization signal (which is different from the downlink synchronization signal transmitted according to the system default configuration). The macro cell and the small cell can coordinate with the small cell to learn the B corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the macro cell. Such coordination can be performed through the X2 interface, the S1 interface, or through the OAM or even the UE (not limited to the UE that needs to perform small cell discovery). ) get on.

以 X2 接口的协调为例, 宏小区可以通过 X2 Setup 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向小小区指示宏小区 的 S S的配置信息 (宏小区还可以通过 handover preparation流程消息中携带 的基站间的 RRC信息例如 AS-Config将宏小区的 SS的配置信息通知小小 区) , 或者宏小区通过上述 X2消息向小小区推荐(小小区的) SS的配置信 息, 小小区接收到该配置信息后即可以对其自身的 SS进行配置, 以完成小 区间的协调。 反过来, 小小区也可以通过 X2 Setup 流程消息 , ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向宏小区指示其 SS 的配置, 宏小区于是通过空口为 UE配置相应的 SS测量。 通过 S1接口或者 其它接口协调小区间的配置的方法包括, 宏基站通过 MME 和 /或网关 ( gateway,例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW )向对方基站传递 SS的配置或者推荐 SS 的配置, 和 /或, 小基站通过 MME和 /或网关 ( gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向宏基站传递 SS的配置或者推荐 SS的配置。 通过网管系统协调小区 间的配置的方法包括, 网管系统向宏基站指示 SS配置, 网管系统向小基站 指示 SS配置; 或者网管系统向宏基站发送小小区的 SS配置信息, 向小基 站发送宏小区的 SS配置信息。 通过 UE传递 macro和小小区间的配置具体 方式包括, 宏 UE在切换到小小区后将之前宏小区为其配置的 SS配置信息 发送给小小区, 或者, 小小区切换到宏小区后将之前小小区为其配置的 SS 配置信息发送给宏小区, 或者, 宏基站让 UE通过测量过程接收小小区的系 统信息, 其中包括 SS配置信息, 并由 UE上报给宏基站。 通过 UE上报的 相邻小 区配置信息的方式也可以称为 自 组织 /自 优化网络技术 ( self-organizing/self-optimization network ) 。 Taking the coordination of the X2 interface as an example, the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message. The configuration information of the SS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the SS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell is small through the X2 message. The cell recommendation (small cell) configuration information of the SS, after receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own SS to complete the coordination between the cells. Conversely, the small cell can also indicate the configuration of its SS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setup flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message. The macro cell then configures the corresponding SS measurement for the UE through the air interface. The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes: the macro base station transmits the configuration of the SS or the configuration of the recommended SS to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW), and/or, The small base station transmits the configuration of the SS or the configuration of the recommended SS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW). Coordinating the cell through the network management system The configuration method includes: the network management system indicates the SS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the SS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the SS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the SS configuration information of the macro cell to the small base station. The specific mode of transmitting the macro between the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the SS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell and then small The SS configuration information of the cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the SS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station. The manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.

步骤 602: UE接收宏基站发来的第一下行信号的测量配置信息。  Step 602: The UE receives measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station.

宏基站首先为宏 UE进行测量配置, 在测量配置信息中包括 SS的配置 信息(干扰测量资源配置信息) , 测量配置信息中还包括用于控制是否启动 对非服务小区进行测量的门限参数(threshold ) 。 测量配置信息中还可以包 括用于过滤测量数值的参数信息 k。 宏 UE接收宏基站的无线链路重配消息 ( RRCConnectionReconfiguration ) , 其中包括上述测量配置信息。  The macro base station first performs measurement configuration for the macro UE, and includes configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information) of the SS in the measurement configuration information, and the measurement configuration information further includes a threshold parameter (threshold for controlling whether to start measurement on the non-serving cell) ). The measurement configuration information may also include parameter information k for filtering the measured values. The macro UE receives a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration) of the macro base station, which includes the above measurement configuration information.

步骤 603: UE根据所述测量配置信息, 测量 SS对应的 RE上的干扰强 度。  Step 603: The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the SS according to the measurement configuration information.

宏 UE测量服务小区(即宏小区)的下行同步信号(包括主同步信号 PSS 和辅同步信号 SSS, 也可以只测其中一个) (或干扰测量资源) 所对应的资 源单元上的接收信号强度 ( synchronization signal - received signal strength indicator, 缩写为 SS-RSSI,物理层的测量是基于所测带宽上的 SS对应的 RE 上的总接收功率的线性平均值), 并且测量服务小区的同步信号的接收信号 功率( synchronization signal received power, 缩写为 SSRP, 物理层的测量是 基于所测带宽上的 SS对应的 RE上的同步信号功率贡献的线性平均值) , 二者之差 ( SS-RSSI减去 SSRP, 称为 SS-RSSI' ) 为宏 UE测量到的干扰强 度即非服务小区的接收信号强度, 可能包括来自相邻的小小区的信号功率, 以及来自相邻的宏小区的信号功率。 UE对物理层测量到的 SS-RSSI,进行 L3 (层 3 )过滤,也可以对 SS-RSSI 和 SSRP分别进行过滤,再用过滤后的值计算 SS-RSSI,。具体的过滤公式是:The macro UE measures the received signal strength on the resource unit corresponding to the downlink synchronization signal of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell) (including the primary synchronization signal PSS and the secondary synchronization signal SSS, or only one of them) (or the interference measurement resource) ( The synchronization signal - received signal strength indicator, abbreviated as SS-RSSI, the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the total received power on the RE corresponding to the SS over the measured bandwidth, and the received signal of the synchronization signal of the serving cell is measured. Power (received signal received power, abbreviated as SSRP, the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the power contribution of the synchronization signal on the RE corresponding to the SS over the measured bandwidth), the difference between the two (SS-RSSI minus SSRP, The SS-RSSI') is the interference strength measured by the macro UE, that is, the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, and may include signal power from adjacent small cells, and signal power from neighboring macro cells. The UE performs L3 (Layer 3) filtering on the SS-RSSI measured by the physical layer, and also filters SS-RSSI and SSRP separately, and then calculates the SS-RSSI by using the filtered value. The specific filtering formula is:

Fn ^ (\ - a) - Fn_l + a - M^ 其中, a = ^, 是来自物理层的最新测量结果, ^是 更新后的过滤后的测量结果, 是上一次过滤后的测量结果。 F n ^ (\ - a) - F n _ l + a - M^ where a = ^, is the latest measurement result from the physical layer, ^ is the updated filtered measurement result, which is the last filtered Measurement results.

步驟 604: 所述 UE基于所述 RE上第一下行信号的干扰强度, 确定是 否开启对非服务小区的测量, 若开启, 则执行步驟 605; 否则, 结束处理流 程。  Step 604: The UE determines, according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, execute step 605; otherwise, end the processing process.

基于过滤后的 SS-RSSI', 宏 UE控制对非服务小区的测量。 具体来说, 如果

Figure imgf000031_0001
(或者 SS- SSr>threshold也可以) , 则宏 UE启 动对非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 否则宏 UE可以不测量同频和异频的 非服务小区或小小区 (也可以是其他制式的非服务小区, 或小小区) 。 当宏 UE0离 picol和 pico2都比较远时, 测得的 SS-RSSI'可能会低于 threshold, 因此不会启动对非服务小区 (或小小区)的测量(小小区的测量配置可能与 非服务小区的测量配置相同, 也可能不同 ) ; 而如果宏 UE1和宏 UE2分别 靠近 picol和 pico2,测到的 SS-RSSI'由于包括了 pico的 PSS/SSS的功率(也 就是干扰强度) , 会相对较高, 并且随着它们各自靠近 picol 和 pico2, 会 趋向于增大, 当它们各自测到的 SS-RSSI'大于 threshold时, UE1、 UE2各 自就会启动对非服务小区 (或小小区)的测量, 从而通过小区搜索发现并识 别非服务小区或小小区 (即图中的 picol或 pico2 ) 。 Based on the filtered SS-RSSI', the macro UE controls the measurement of the non-serving cell. Specifically, if
Figure imgf000031_0001
(or SS-SSr>threshold is also possible), then the macro UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell), otherwise the macro UE may not measure the non-serving cell or the small cell of the same frequency and different frequency (may be other a non-serving cell of a standard, or a small cell). When macro UE0 is far away from picol and pico2, the measured SS-RSSI' may be lower than threshold, so measurement of non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be initiated (small cell measurement configuration may be non-serving) The measurement configuration of the cell is the same or different); and if the macro UE1 and the macro UE2 are close to picol and pico2, respectively, the measured SS-RSSI' will be relatively more due to the power of the PSS/SSS including the pico (that is, the interference strength). High, and as they are close to picol and pico2, they tend to increase. When their respective measured SS-RSSI' is greater than threshold, UE1 and UE2 each initiate a non-serving cell (or small cell). Measure, thereby discovering and identifying non-serving cells or small cells (ie, picol or pico2 in the figure) through cell search.

以上基于 SS-RSSI'的测量反映的是干扰强度即非服务小区的接收信号 强度,考虑到在无线资源管理中通常用于决策的是服务小区与相邻小区的信 号强度的相对值(例如切换判决中),因此还可以定义 SSRQ=SSRP/SS-RSSI,, 其中 SSRQ ( synchronization signal received quality ) 为新定义的同步信号接 收质量, SSRP ( synchronization signal received power ) 为同步信号接收功率 (在非零功率 PSS/SSS所对应的 RE上测量, 物理层的测量是基于所测带宽 上的 SS对应的 RE上的同步信号功率贡献的线性平均值) 。 这个值反映了 服务小区的信号功率与干扰强度 (非服务小区的信号强度) 的比值, 因此, 既能反映 UE是否远离服务的宏小区, 也能反映 UE是否靠近小小区。 因此, UE也可以基于上述定义的 SSRQ的测量来控制对非服务小区或小小区的测 量。 例如, 当 SSRQ低于基站配置的门限时, UE启动对非服务小区或小小 区的测量, 否则 UE可以不测量非服务小区或小小区。 The above measurement based on SS-RSSI' reflects the interference strength, that is, the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, considering that the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell (usually switched) is generally used for decision making in radio resource management. In the judgment), it is also possible to define SSRQ=SSRP/SS-RSSI, where SSRQ (synchronization signal received quality) is the newly defined synchronization signal reception quality, SSRP (synchronization signal received power) is the synchronization signal reception power (at non-zero The measurement on the RE corresponding to the power PSS/SSS is based on the linear average of the power contribution of the synchronization signal on the RE corresponding to the SS on the measured bandwidth. This value reflects The ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength (the signal strength of the non-serving cell), therefore, can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell, and can also reflect whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell based on the measurement of the SSRQ defined above. For example, when the SSRQ is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell or the small cell.

另夕卜,上面的判定条件是使用测量值与门限值的大小比较作为判定依据 (或者判断依据之一) 的, 这种方法可称为强度判定法。 此外, 也可以考虑 根据测量值的增量作为启动同频 /异频测量的判别条件 (之一),这种方法称为 增量判定法。 根据 SS-RSSI'或 SSRQ在一定时间内的增量(变化量 ): 测得 SS-RSSI'增大意味着非服务小区信号 (或干扰) 强度增强, 如果 SS-RSSI' 持续增强, 可能说明距离另一个小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动测量; 或者, SSRQ的减小意味着干扰强度增加和 /或服务小区信号强度减小, 如果 SSRQ 持续减小, 可能说明距离服务小区越来越远, 而距离相邻小区越来越近, 可 以考虑启动测量。增量判定法和强度判定法也可以联合起来判别是否启动非 服务小区或小小区测量。  In addition, the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method. In addition, it is also possible to consider the increment of the measured value as one of the discriminating conditions for starting the same-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called the incremental decision method. Incremental (variation) according to SS-RSSI' or SSRQ within a certain time: The measured SS-RSSI' increase means that the non-serving cell signal (or interference) strength is enhanced, if SS-RSSI' continues to increase, it may be explained Closer to another cell, you can consider starting the measurement; or, the reduction of SSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the signal strength of the serving cell decreases. If the SSRQ continues to decrease, it may indicate that it is farther away from the serving cell. , and getting closer and closer to the neighboring cell, you can consider starting the measurement. The incremental decision method and the strength decision method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.

通常小小区发现的启动并不需要独自启动, 小小区发现可以在非服务小 区测量之中进行, 而对非服务小区的测量不仅需要考虑小小区发现的需要, 也需要考虑在宏小区间的 UE移动性 (例如切换) 的需要, 为此, 可以采用 联合判定准则, 即将 SS-RSSI'或, SSRQ的测量与, RSRP (基于 CRS的) 或, SSRP的测量中的至少两个联合起来控制对同频 /异频非服务小区 (相邻 小区) 的测量。 例如, 方式 1 : 如果 SS-RSSr>threshold, 或 RSRP小于某一 基站配置的门限,启动对非服务小区的测量;方式 2: 当 SS-RSSF>thresliold, 或 SSRP小于某一门限 (可能由基站配置) , 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方 式 3: 如果 SSRQ<thresholdl , 或 RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非 服务小区的测量;方式 4:如果 SS Q<thresholdl, 或 SSRP小于某一门限(可 能由基站配置), 启动对非服务小区的测量。 如果测量的启动只针对小小区 发现, 也可以将 SS-RSSI'或, SSRQ的测量与, RSRP (基于 CRS的) 或, SSRP的测量中的至少两个联合起来控制对小小区的测量, 具体来说, 的例 子将上面的 4种方式中的条件判断的 "或" 关系改成 "且" 关系就可以了。 用单个条件的判断准则, 在单个条件的判断准则满足时再执行联合判定准 则, 具体的例子如下: 首先或缺省釆用基于 CRS的 RSRP的判定准则, 当 基于 CRS测量值 RSRP小于预定义的或基站配置的门限值时, 再执行联合 判定准则以通过新的测量(例如 SS-RSSI'或 SSRQ的测量)来确定是否启动 同频或异频测量。 又例如, 特定传输模式下的 UE使用联合判定准则进行测 量控制。 基站也可以显示地或隐含地通过信令指示 UE执行联合判定准则, 这些信令包括 Radio Resource Control ( C ) 层 IE, MAC层控制元 control element, 物理层下行控制信息( downlink control information, 缩写为 DCI ) 。 Generally, the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone. The small cell discovery can be performed in the non-serving cell measurement, and the measurement of the non-serving cell needs not only the needs of small cell discovery but also the UE between macro cells. The need for mobility (eg, handover), for which a joint decision criterion may be employed, ie, the SS-RSSI' or SSRQ measurement is combined with at least two of the RSRP (CRS-based) or SSRP measurements to control the pair. Measurement of co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cells (adjacent cells). For example, mode 1: if SS-RSSr>threshold, or RSRP is smaller than a threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of a non-serving cell; mode 2: when SS-RSSF>thresliold, or SSRP is less than a certain threshold (possibly by base station (Configuration), initiate measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 3: If SSRQ<thresholdl, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 4: If SS Q<thresholdl, or SSRP is smaller than some A threshold (possibly configured by the base station) initiates measurements on non-serving cells. If the start of the measurement is only for small cell discovery, you can also measure SS-RSSI' or, SSRQ with, RSRP (CRS-based) or, At least two of the SSRP measurements are combined to control the measurement of the small cell. Specifically, the example changes the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four modes to the "and" relationship. Using a single conditional criterion, the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied. The specific examples are as follows: First or default, the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined one. Or when the base station configures the threshold, the joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (such as SS-RSSI' or SSRQ measurement). As another example, UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control. The base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including Radio Resource Control (C) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).

步骤 605: UE开启对非服务小区的测量。  Step 605: The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.

启动对非服务小区(或小小区)的测量的方式至少有以下两种: 方式一, 服务基站已经为 UE配置了非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 但该测量需要 等待 UE对具体条件的判定才能启动; 方式二, UE在判定满足 (基站配置 的)上报条件后向服务基站报告测量结果或发送特定的指示(例如强干扰指 示),基站根据测量结果或接收到的特定的指示进行非服务小区(或小小区) 的测量配置(和 /或测量的启动) 。 这样, 可以使得宏 UE只有在靠近小小区 的局部区域才执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 在远离小小区的大部分区 域内都不需要执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 从而既减少了由于测量导 致的耗电和计算开销, 也能够及时的发现小小区并通过切换 /分流到小小区 或以小小区作为辅载波来提升服务质量(包括吞吐量),减少宏小区的负荷。  There are at least two ways to start the measurement of the non-serving cell (or the small cell). In the first mode, the serving base station has configured the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the specific condition of the UE. The method can be started. In the second manner, the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (for example, a strong interference indication) after determining that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, and the base station performs the measurement according to the measurement result or the specific indication received. Measurement configuration (and/or measurement start) of a non-serving cell (or small cell). In this way, the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect the small cell in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) by switching/diverting to the small cell or using the small cell as the secondary carrier, reducing the load of the macro cell. .

实施例五、  Embodiment 5

步骤 701: Macro Cell与小小区之间进行资源协调。  Step 701: Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.

具体的, 通过 X2接口、 S1接口、 通过网管 ( OAM ) 甚至 UE (不限于 需要进行小小区发现的 UE ) 进行 Macro Cell与小小区之间的资源协调。 以 X2接口的协调为例,宏小区可以通过 X2 Setu 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向小小区指示宏小区的 CRS的配置 信息 (宏小区还可以通过 handover preparation 流程消息中携带的基站间的 RRC信息例如 AS-Config将宏小区的 CRS的配置信息通知小小区) , 或者 宏小区通过上述 X2消息向小小区推荐 (小小区的) CRS的配置信息, 小小 区接收到该配置信息后即可以对其自身的 CRS进行配置, 以完成小区间的 协调。 反过来, 小小区也可以通过 X2 Setu 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向宏小区指示其 CRS的配置, 宏小 区于是通过空口为 UE配置相应的 CRS测量。 通过 S 1接口或者其它接口协 调小区间的配置的方法包括, 宏基站通过 MME和 /或网关 ( gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向对方基站传递 CRS的配置或者推荐 CRS的配置, 和 / 或, 小基站通过 MME和 /或网关 (gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S 1 GW ) 向宏 基站传递 CRS的配置或者推荐 CRS的配置。 通过网管系统协调小区间的配 置的方法包括, 网管系统向宏基站指示 CRS 配置, 网管系统向小基站指示 CRS配置; 或者网管系统向宏基站发送小小区的 CRS配置信息, 向小基站 发送宏小区的 CRS配置信息。通过 UE传递 macro和小小区间的配置具体方 式包括,宏 UE在切换到小小区后将之前宏小区为其配置的 CRS配置信息发 送给小小区, 或者, 小小区切换到宏小区后将之前小小区为其配置的 CRS 配置信息发送给宏小区, 或者, 宏基站让 UE通过测量过程接收小小区的系 统信息, 其中包括 CRS配置信息, 并由 UE上报给宏基站。 通过 UE上报的 相邻小 区配置信息的方式也可以称为 自 组织 /自 优化网络技术 ( self-organizing/self-optimization network ) 。 Specifically, resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell is performed through the X2 interface, the S1 interface, the network management (OAM), or even the UE (not limited to the UE that needs to perform small cell discovery). Taking the coordination of the X2 interface as an example, the macro cell can pass the X2 Setu process message, ENB Configuration The update process message, or the X2 message such as the Load Information message, directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, the X2 proxy) indicates the configuration information of the CRS of the macro cell to the small cell (the macro cell can also be carried in the handover preparation flow message) The RRC information between the base stations, for example, AS-Config notifies the configuration information of the CRS of the macro cell to the small cell, or the macro cell recommends the configuration information of the CRS (small cell) to the small cell through the X2 message, and the small cell receives the configuration information. After that, its own CRS can be configured to complete coordination between cells. Conversely, the small cell can also indicate the configuration of the CRS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through the X2 Setu flow message, the ENB Configuration Update flow message, or the X2 message such as the Load Information message. The macro cell then configures the corresponding CRS measurement for the UE through the air interface. The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes: the macro base station transmits the CRS configuration or the recommended CRS configuration to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW), and/or The small base station transmits the configuration of the CRS or the configuration of the recommended CRS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (for example, HeNB GW, S 1 GW ). The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates the CRS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the CRS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the CRS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the macro cell to the small base station. CRS configuration information. The specific mode of transmitting the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the CRS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell and then small The CRS configuration information that is configured by the cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the CRS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station. The manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.

如果宏小区与小小区的 CRS时频资源是对齐的(即 CRS-colliding场景 ), 则宏 UE测量到的干扰强度包括了小小区的 CRS信号功率,而如果二者不对 齐, 则宏小区的 CRS所占 RE可能对应的是小小区的其它下行信号(例如数 据区域) , 为了保证测量的准确性以及小小区的发现不受其负荷影响(即便 在小小区低负荷或者无负荷时也可以发现小小区), 最好通过某种方法让小 小区在与宏小区的 CRS对应的 RE上有下行信号发送,例如小小区可以在与 宏小区的 CRS对应的 RE上传输下行数据(通过相应的调度可以达到 )或者 仿制数据 (dummy ) , 例如, 如果测量带宽所对应的 PRB上小小区有数据 发送, 则正常发送数据, 否则就发送 dummy RE; 或者在与宏小区 CRS对应 的 RE位置上 pico总是发送 dummy RE, dummy RE之夕卜的 RE上可以正常 传输数据。 或者还可以传输第二 CRS信号 (有别于按照系统缺省配置传输 的 CRS ) 。 宏小区与小小区之间可以通过协调令小小区获知宏小区的 CRS 对应的配置, 包括物理小区 ID ( PCI )、 端口数(或端口号)、 测量带宽(例 如测量带宽的中心频点和 RB数) , 这样的协调可以通过 X2/S1接口进行或 者网管系统甚至 UE进行。 If the CRS time-frequency resources of the macro cell and the small cell are aligned (ie, CRS-colliding scenario), the interference strength measured by the macro UE includes the CRS signal power of the small cell, and if the two are not aligned, the macro cell The RE of the CRS may correspond to other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the small cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by the load (even A small cell may also be found when the small cell is under low load or no load. Preferably, the small cell has a downlink signal on the RE corresponding to the CRS of the macro cell, for example, the small cell may be in the CRS with the macro cell. The downlink data (which can be reached by the corresponding scheduling) or the dummy data (dummy) is transmitted on the corresponding RE. For example, if the small cell on the PRB corresponding to the measurement bandwidth has data transmission, the data is normally sent, otherwise the dummy RE is sent; or The pico always transmits a dummy RE at the RE position corresponding to the macro cell CRS, and the data can be normally transmitted on the RE of the dummy RE. Or it is also possible to transmit a second CRS signal (unlike the CRS transmitted according to the system default configuration). The macro cell and the small cell can coordinate the configuration of the CRS corresponding to the macro cell by the small cell, including the physical cell ID (PCI), the number of ports (or port number), and the measurement bandwidth (for example, the center frequency of the measurement bandwidth and the RB). Number)) Such coordination can be performed through the X2/S1 interface or the network management system or even the UE.

步驟 702: UE接收宏基站发来的测量配置信息。  Step 702: The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.

这里, 所述测量配置信息包括: CRS的配置信息(干扰测量资源配置信 息) ; 所述 CRS的配置信息可能包括子帧配置信息、 CRS频域偏移量、 或 者与 CRS频域偏移量对应的物理小区标识 ( PCI, Physical Cell Identity ) , CRS的配置信息还可以包括端口数或端口号。优选地, 所述测量配置信息还 可以包括: 用于控制是否启动对非服务小区进行测量的门限参数 ( threshold ) 、 以及用于过滤测量数值的参数信息 k。  Here, the measurement configuration information includes: CRS configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information); the CRS configuration information may include subframe configuration information, CRS frequency domain offset, or corresponding to a CRS frequency domain offset The physical cell identifier (PCI, Physical Cell Identity), the configuration information of the CRS may also include the port number or port number. Preferably, the measurement configuration information may further include: a threshold parameter for controlling whether to start measurement on the non-serving cell, and parameter information k for filtering the measurement value.

宏基站为宏 UE的 CRS测量配置并非只能测量缺省的带宽,宏基站还可 以配置干扰强度测量的带宽, 该配置可以采用以下方法表示, 例如测量中心 频点 +带宽 (RB个数) , RB起始索引和结束索引, RB起始索引和 RB数, 等等。 这样, 即便宏小区与小小区不同频(即二者的中心频点不同) , 但只 要宏小区与小小区的频谱有交叠,则可以通过在交叠的带宽上的测量来判断 是否宏 UE靠近了异频的小小区, 从而启动对异频的小小区的测量。  The macro base station configures the CRS measurement of the macro UE not only to measure the default bandwidth, but also the macro base station can configure the bandwidth of the interference strength measurement. The configuration can be expressed by the following method, for example, measuring the center frequency + bandwidth (the number of RBs). RB start index and end index, RB start index and RB number, and so on. In this way, even if the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies (that is, the center frequency points of the two are different), as long as the spectrum of the macro cell and the small cell overlap, the macro UE can be determined by measurement on the overlapping bandwidth. Close to the small cell of the different frequency, thereby starting the measurement of the small cell with different frequency.

所述 UE接收宏基站发来的测量配置信息可以为: UE接收所述宏基站 通过无线链路重配消息( RRCConnectionReconfiguration )发来的测量配置信 步驟 703: UE根据所述测量配置信息, 测量 CRS对应的 RE上的干扰 强度。 The receiving, by the UE, the measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station may be: receiving, by the UE, the measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration) Step 703: The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the CRS according to the measurement configuration information.

在宏小区和小小区共存的场景中, 宏 UE测量服务小区 (即宏小区) 的 小区级参考信号 CRS (或干扰测量资源)所对应的资源单元上的接收信号强 度 ( CRS - received signal strength indicator, 缩写为 CRS-RSSI, 物理层的测 量是基于所测带宽上的 CRS对应的 RE上的总接收功率的线性平均值), 并 且测量服务小区的 CRS的接收信号功率 RSRP(物理层的测量是基于所测带 宽上的 CRS对应的 RE上的 CRS 的功率贡献的线性平均值) , 二者之差 ( CRS-RSSI减去 RSRP, 称为 CRS-RSSI' )为宏 UE测量到的非服务小区的 接收信号强度, 可能包括来自相邻的小小区的信号功率, 以及来自相邻的宏 小区的信号功率。  In a scenario where the macro cell and the small cell coexist, the macro UE measures the received signal strength (CRS - received signal strength indicator) on the resource unit corresponding to the cell level reference signal CRS (or interference measurement resource) of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell). , abbreviated as CRS-RSSI, the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the total received power on the RE corresponding to the CRS on the measured bandwidth), and the received signal power RSRP of the CRS of the serving cell is measured (the measurement of the physical layer is Based on the linear average of the power contribution of the CRS on the RE corresponding to the CRS on the measured bandwidth, the difference between the two (CRS-RSSI minus RSRP, referred to as CRS-RSSI') is the non-serving cell measured by the macro UE. The received signal strength may include signal power from neighboring small cells, as well as signal power from neighboring macro cells.

UE 对物理层测量到的 CRS-RSSI'进行 L3 (层 3 ) 过滤, 也可以对 CRS-RSSI和 RSRP分别进行过滤, 再用过滤后的值计算 CRS-RSSI'。 具体 的过滤公式是: Fn = (\ - a) - Fn_l + a - Mn ^ 其中, a = i/2(k/4) , ^是来自物理层的 最新测量结果, Fn是更新后的过滤后的测量结果, Fn_i是上一次过滤后的测 量结果。 The UE performs L3 (layer 3) filtering on the CRS-RSSI' measured by the physical layer, and may also filter the CRS-RSSI and the RSRP separately, and then calculate the CRS-RSSI' by using the filtered value. The specific filtering formula is: F n = (\ - a) - F n _ l + a - M n ^ where a = i /2 (k/4) , ^ is the latest measurement from the physical layer, Fn is After the updated filtered measurement, F n _i is the measurement result after the last filter.

步驟 704: 所述 UE基于 CRS RE上测量到的干扰强度, 确定是否开启 对非服务小区的测量, 若开启, 则执行步驟 705; 否则, 结束处理流程。  Step 704: The UE determines, according to the interference strength measured on the CRS RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, execute step 705; otherwise, end the processing flow.

具体来说, 如果 CRS-RSSI,>=threshold (或者 CRS-RSSI,>threshold也 可以 ) , 则宏 UE启动对非服务小区 (或小小区 ) 的测量, 否则宏 UE可以 不测量同频和异频的非服务小区或小小区 (也可以是其他制式的非服务小 区,或小小区)。如果宏 UE0离 icol和 ico2都比较远, 测得的 CRS-RSSI' 可能会低于 threshold, 因此不会启动对非服务小区 (或小小区)的测量(小 小区的测量配置可能与非服务小区的测量配置相同, 也可能不同) ; 而宏 UE1和宏 UE2如果分别靠近 picol和 ico2, 测到的 CRS-RSSI'由于包括了 pico的 CRS的功率 (也就是干扰强度) , 会相对较高, 并且随着它们各自 靠近 picol 和 pico2 , 会趋向于增大, 当它们各自测到的 CRS-RSSI'大于 threshold时, UE1、 UE2各自就会启动对非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 从而通过小区搜索发现并识别非服务小区或小小区 (即图中的 picol 或 pico2 ) 。 Specifically, if CRS-RSSI, >=threshold (or CRS-RSSI, >threshold is also possible), the macro UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell), otherwise the macro UE may not measure the same frequency and different A non-serving cell or a small cell (which may also be a non-serving cell of another standard, or a small cell). If the macro UE0 is far away from ico and ico2, the measured CRS-RSSI' may be lower than the threshold, so the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be initiated (the measurement configuration of the small cell may be related to the non-serving cell) The measurement configuration is the same or different); and if macro UE1 and macro UE2 are close to picol and ico2 respectively, the measured CRS-RSSI' will be relatively high due to the power of the CRS including the pico (that is, the interference strength), and With their respective Close to picol and pico2, it tends to increase. When their respective measured CRS-RSSI' is greater than threshold, UE1 and UE2 each initiate measurement of non-serving cells (or small cells), so that they can be found through cell search. And identify the non-serving cell or small cell (ie picol or pico2 in the figure).

以上基于 CRS-RSSI'的测量反映的是干扰强度即非服务小区的接收信 号强度,考虑到在无线资源管理中通常用于决策的是服务小区与相邻小区的 信号强度的相对值 (例如切换判决中) , 因此还可以定义 RSRQ,=RSRP/ CRS- SSF , 其中 RSRQ,为新定义的参考信号接收质量。 这个值反映了服务 小区的信号功率与干扰强度(非服务小区的信号强度)的比值, 因此, 既能 反映 UE是否远离服务的宏小区, 也能反映 UE是否靠近小小区。 因此, UE 也可以基于上述定义的 RSRQ,的测量来控制对非服务小区或小小区的测量。 例如, 当 RSRQ,低于基站配置的门限时, UE启动对非服务小区或小小区的 测量, 否则 UE可以不测量非服务小区或小小区。  The above measurement based on CRS-RSSI' reflects the interference strength, that is, the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, considering that the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell (usually switched) is generally used for decision making in radio resource management. In the judgment), it is therefore also possible to define RSRQ, =RSRP/CRS-SSF, where RSRQ is the quality of the newly defined reference signal reception. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength (the signal strength of the non-serving cell). Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell based on the measurement of the RSRQ defined above. For example, when the RSRQ is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell or the small cell.

另外,上面的判定条件是使用测量值与门限值的大小比较作为判定依据 (或者判断依据之一) 的, 这种方法可称为强度判定法。 此外, 也可以考虑 根据测量值的增量作为启动同频 /异频测量的判别条件 (之一),这种方法称为 增量判定法。根据 CRS-RSSI'或 RSRQ,在一定时间内的增量:测得 CRS-RSSI' 增大意味着非服务小区信号 (或干扰信号)强度增强, 如果 CRS-RSSI'持续 增强, 可能说明距离另一个小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动测量等。 增量判定 法和强度判定法也可以联合起来判别是否启动非服务小区或小小区测量。  In addition, the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method. In addition, it is also possible to consider the increment of the measured value as one of the discriminating conditions for starting the same-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called the incremental decision method. According to CRS-RSSI' or RSRQ, the increment in a certain time: the measured CRS-RSSI' increase means that the strength of the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced, and if the CRS-RSSI' is continuously enhanced, it may indicate the distance from another A cell is getting closer and closer, and you can consider starting measurements. The incremental decision method and the strength decision method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.

通常小小区发现的启动并不需要独自启动, 小小区发现可以在非服务小 区测量之中进行, 而对非服务小区的测量不仅需要考虑小小区发现的需要, 也需要考虑在宏小区间的 UE移动性 (例如切换) 的需要, 为此, 可以釆用 联合判定准则 , 即将 CRS-RSSI' , RSRQ' , RS P (基于 CRS的) , RSRQ, CSI-RSRP中的至少两个联合起来控制对同频 /异频非服务小区 (相邻小区) 的测量。 例如, 方式 1 : 如果 CRS-RSSr>threshoW, 或 RSRP小于某一基站 配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 2: 当 CRS-RSSI,>threshold, 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 3 : 如果 RSRQ,<thresholdl, 或 RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务 小区的测量; 方式 4: 如果 RSRQ,<thresholdl, 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基站 配置的门限,启动对非服务小区的测量。如果测量的启动只针对小小区发现, 也可以将 CRS-RSSI,, RSRQ,, RSRP (基于 CRS的) , RSRQ, CSI-RSRP 的测量联合起来控制对小小区的测量,具体的例子将上面的 4种方式中的条 件判断的 "或" 关系改成 "且" 关系就可以了。 用单个条件的判断准则, 在单个条件的判断准则满足时再执行联合判定准 则, 具体的例子如下: 首先或缺省采用基于 CRS的 RSRP的判定准则, 当 基于 CRS测量值 RSRP小于预定义的或基站配置的门限值时, 再执行联合 判定准则以通过新的测量(例如 CRS-RSSI,或 RSRQ,的测量)来确定是否启 动同频或异频测量。 又例如, 特定传输模式下的 UE使用联合判定准则进行 测量控制。 基站也可以显示地隐含地通过信令指示 UE执行联合判定准则, 这些信令包括 Radio Resource Control ( RRC ) 层 IE, MAC层控制元 control element, 物理层下行控制信息 ( downlink control information, 缩写为 DCI )。 Generally, the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone. The small cell discovery can be performed in the non-serving cell measurement, and the measurement of the non-serving cell needs not only the needs of small cell discovery but also the UE between macro cells. The need for mobility (such as handover), for which reason, the joint decision criterion can be used, that is, at least two of CRS-RSSI', RSRQ', RS P (based on CRS), RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP are combined to control the pair. Measurement of co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cells (adjacent cells). For example, mode 1: If CRS-RSSr>threshoW, or RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 2: When CRS-RSSI,>threshold, Or the CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, and starts the measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 3: If the RSRQ, <threshold1, or RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, the measurement of the non-serving cell is started; If the RSRQ, <threshold1, or CSI-RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, the measurement of the non-serving cell is initiated. If the measurement is initiated only for small cell discovery, CRS-RSSI, RSRQ, RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, CSI-RSRP measurements can also be combined to control the measurement of small cells. The specific example will be the above. The "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the four ways is changed to the "and" relationship. Using a single conditional criterion, the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied. The specific examples are as follows: First or default, the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined or When the base station is configured with a threshold, the joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (for example, CRS-RSSI, or RSRQ). As another example, UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control. The base station may also implicitly indicate, by means of signaling, that the UE performs joint determination criteria, including a Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, a MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviated as DCI).

步骤 705: UE开启对非服务小区的测量。  Step 705: The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.

具体启动对非服务小区 (或小小区)的测量的方式至少有以下两种: 方 式一, 服务基站已经为 UE配置了非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 但该测 量需要等待 UE对具体条件的判定才能启动; 方式二, UE在判定满足 (基 站配置的)上报条件后向服务基站报告测量结果或发送特定的指示(例如强 干扰指示) , 基站根据测量结果或接收到的特定的指示进行非服务小区(或 小小区) 的测量配置(和 /或测量的启动) 。 这样, 可以使得宏 UE只有在靠 近小小区的局部区域才执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 在远离小小区的 大部分区域内都不需要执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 从而既减少了由 于测量导致的耗电和计算开销, 也能够及时的发现小小区并通过切换 /分流 到小小区或以小小区作为辅载波来提升服务质量(包括吞吐量) , 减少宏小 区的负荷。 实施例六、 The method for specifically starting the measurement of the non-serving cell (or the small cell) is as follows: In the first mode, the serving base station has configured the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to specifically The determination of the condition can be started. In the second manner, the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (for example, a strong interference indication) after determining that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, and the base station according to the measurement result or the specific indication received. The measurement configuration (and/or the start of the measurement) of the non-serving cell (or small cell) is performed. In this way, the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect the small cell in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) by switching/diverting to the small cell or using the small cell as the secondary carrier, reducing the macro size. The load of the area. Embodiment 6

步骤 801: Macro Cell与小小区之间进行资源协调。  Step 801: Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.

如果宏小区与小小区的 CSI-RS时频资源是对齐的(即 CSI-RS-colliding 场景) , 则宏 UE测量到的干扰强度包括了小小区的 CSI-RS信号功率, 而 如果二者不对齐, 则宏小区的 CSI-RS所占 RE可能对应的是小小区的其它 下行信号(例如数据区域) , 为了保证测量的准确性以及小小区的发现不受 其负荷影响(即便在小小区低负荷或者无负荷时也可以发现小小区) , 最好 通过某种方法让小小区在与宏小区的 CSI-RS对应的 RE上有下行信号发送, 例如小小区可以在与宏小区的 CSI-RS对应的 RE上传输下行数据 (通过相 应的调度可以达到) 或者伪数据 ( dummy RE ) 。 宏小区与小小区之间可以 通过协调令小小区获知宏小区的 CSI-RS 及测量相关的配置, 包括 CSI-RS 子帧配置信息, 测量带宽 (例如测量带宽的中心频点和 RB数) , 这样的协 调可以通过 X2/S1接口 (例如通过 X2 setup过程或者 eNB配置更新过程或 者其它 X2/S1信令过程) 进行或者网管系统甚至 UE (不限于需要进行小小 区发现的 UE ) 进行。  If the CSI-RS time-frequency resources of the macro cell and the small cell are aligned (ie, CSI-RS-colliding scenario), the interference strength measured by the macro UE includes the CSI-RS signal power of the small cell, and if the two are not Alignment, the CSI-RS occupied by the macro cell may correspond to other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the small cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by the load (even in the small cell) A small cell may also be found when the load is loaded or not, and the small cell is preferably sent by a downlink signal on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS of the macro cell. For example, the small cell may be in the CSI-RS with the macro cell. The corresponding RE transmits downlink data (which can be reached by corresponding scheduling) or dummy data (dummy RE). The macro cell and the small cell can coordinate the small cell to learn the CSI-RS and the measurement related configuration of the macro cell, including the CSI-RS subframe configuration information, and measure the bandwidth (for example, the center frequency and the RB number of the measurement bandwidth). Such coordination may be performed through an X2/S1 interface (eg, through an X2 setup procedure or an eNB configuration update procedure or other X2/S1 signaling procedure) or a network management system or even a UE (not limited to UEs requiring small cell discovery).

以 X2 接口的协调为例, 宏小区可以通过 X2 Setup 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向小小区指示宏小区 的 CSI-RS的配置信息 (宏小区还可以通过 handover preparation流程消息中 携带的基站间的 RRC信息例如 AS-Config将宏小区的 CSI-RS的配置信息通 知小小区) , 或者宏小区通过上述 X2消息向小小区推荐 (小小区的) 非零 功率 CSI-RS的配置信息, 小小区接收到该配置信息后即可以对其自身的非 零功率 CSI-RS进行配置, 以完成小区间的协调。 反过来, 小小区也可以通 过 X2 Setup 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update 流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向宏小区指示其非零功率 CSI-RS的配置, 宏小区于是通过空口 为 UE配置相应的 CSI-RS测量。通过 S1接口或者其它接口协调小区间的配 置的方法包括, 宏基站通过 MME和 /或网关 (gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向对方基站传递 CSI-RS的配置或者推荐非零功率 CSI-RS的配置, 和 /或, 小基站通过 MME和 /或网关 ( gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向宏 基站传递非零功率 CSI-RS的配置或者推荐宏基站 CSI-RS的配置。 通过网 管系统协调小区间的配置的方法包括,网管系统向宏基站指示 CSI-RS配置, 网管系统向小基站指示非零功率 CSI-RS配置; 或者网管系统向宏基站发送 小小区的非零功率 CSI-RS配置信息, 向小基站发送宏小区的 CSI-RS配置 信息。 通过 UE传递 macro和小小区间的配置具体方式包括, 宏 UE在切换 到小小区后将之前宏小区为其配置的 CSI-RS配置信息发送给小小区,或者, 小小区切换到宏小区后将之前小小区为其配置的非零功率 CSI-RS配置信息 发送给宏小区, 或者, 宏基站让 UE通过测量过程接收小小区的系统信息, 其中包括非零功率 CSI-RS配置信息, 并由 UE上报给宏基站。 Taking the coordination of the X2 interface as an example, the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message. The configuration information of the CSI-RS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the CSI-RS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell passes the above The X2 message recommends the configuration information of the non-zero-power CSI-RS to the small cell (small cell). After receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own non-zero-power CSI-RS to complete the inter-cell coordination. . In turn, small cells can also pass X2 Setup flow messages, ENB Configuration Update process messages, or Load Information messages, etc. X2 messages directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, The X2 proxy indicates the configuration of the non-zero power CSI-RS to the macro cell, and the macro cell then configures the corresponding CSI-RS measurement for the UE through the air interface. The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes: the macro base station transmits the CSI-RS configuration or the recommended non-zero power CSI-RS to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW). The configuration, and/or, the small base station transmits the configuration of the non-zero power CSI-RS or the configuration of the recommended macro base station CSI-RS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW). The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates the CSI-RS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the non-zero power CSI-RS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the non-zero power of the small cell to the macro base station. The CSI-RS configuration information is used to send CSI-RS configuration information of the macro cell to the small base station. The specific mode of transmitting the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the CSI-RS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or after the small cell switches to the macro cell, The non-zero-power CSI-RS configuration information configured by the small cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including non-zero-power CSI-RS configuration information, by the UE. Reported to the macro base station.

在一个大范围的无线接入网络内,还可以通过大范围的协调来提高小小 区发现的性能,例如使多个 macro小区(组成一个协调的发现区域)的 CSI-RS 对应的 RE对齐 (宏小区间可以通过 X2/S1接口或网管等方式传递 CSI-RS 配置信息) , 服务的宏基站还可以为 UE配置相邻宏基站的 CSI-RS信息, 从而使得 UE测量干扰强度时将包括服务的宏基站以及相邻的宏基站的信号 功率都减掉, 从而使干扰强度只反映小小区的功率强度, 这可以提高启动小 小区测量的准确性。  In a large-scale radio access network, the performance of small cell discovery can also be improved through a large-scale coordination, for example, aligning REs corresponding to CSI-RSs of multiple macro cells (constituting a coordinated discovery area) (macro The small-area may transmit CSI-RS configuration information through an X2/S1 interface or a network management system. The serving macro base station may also configure CSI-RS information of the neighboring macro base station for the UE, so that the UE will include the service when measuring the interference strength. The signal power of the macro base station and the adjacent macro base station are all reduced, so that the interference strength only reflects the power strength of the small cell, which can improve the accuracy of starting small cell measurement.

步骤 802: UE接收宏基站发来的测量配置信息。  Step 802: The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.

这里, 测量配置信息包括第一下行信号配置信息(干扰测量资源配置信 息) , 其中, 第一下行信号为非零功率 CSI-RS, 所述第一下行信号的测量 配置信息包括: 非零功率 CSI-RS资源配置标识 ( 、 资源配 置信息 ( res。urceC。nfig ) 、 子帧配置信息 ( subframeConfig ) 、 天线端口数 ( antennaPortsCount ) 、 扰码标识 ( scramblingldentity ) 、 与 CRS 的准共址信息 ( qcl-CRS-Info )。 测量配置信息还包括用于控制是否启动对非服务小区进行测 量的启动测量门限值 ( threshold ) , 和 /或用于过滤测量数值的参数信息 k。 Here, the measurement configuration information includes first downlink signal configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information), where the first downlink signal is a non-zero power CSI-RS, and the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal includes: Zero-power CSI-RS resource configuration identifier (, resource configuration information (res. urceC.nfig), subframe configuration information (frameConfig), antenna port number (antennaPortsCount), scrambling identity (scramblingldentity), quasi-co-location information with CRS (qcl-CRS-Info). The measurement configuration information further includes a start measurement threshold (threshold) for controlling whether to initiate measurement of the non-serving cell, and/or parameter information k for filtering the measured value.

所述宏基站下发的第一下行信号的测量配置信息可以为:宏基站通过无 线链路重配消息( RRCConnectionReconfiguration )下发第一下行信号的测量 配置信息。  The measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station may be: the macro base station sends the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration).

步驟 803 : UE根据所述测量配置信息, 测量 CSI-RS对应的 RE上的干 扰强度。  Step 803: The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS according to the measurement configuration information.

宏 UE测量服务小区(即宏小区)的信道状态信息参考信号 CSI-RS (或 干扰测量资源)所对应的资源单元(由 UE接收所在服务小区的宏基站下发 的 CSI-RS的测量配置信息所指示) 上的接收信号强度(CSI-RS - received signal strength indicator, 缩写为 CSI-RSSI, 物理层的测量是基于所测带宽上 的 CSI-RS对应的 RE上的总接收功率的线性平均值) , 并且测量服务小区 为 UE配置的 CSI-RS的接收信号功率 CSI-RSRP (物理层的测量是基于所测 带宽上的 CSI-RS对应的 RE上的 CSI-RS的功率贡献的线性平均值), 二者 之差 ( CRS-RSSI减去 CSI-RSRP, 称为 CSI-RSSI' ) 为宏 UE测量到的干扰 强度即非服务小区的接收信号强度, 可能包括来自相邻的小小区的信号功 率, 以及来自相邻的宏小区的信号功率。  The macro UE measures the resource unit corresponding to the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS (or the interference measurement resource) of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell) (the measurement configuration information of the CSI-RS sent by the macro base station of the serving cell received by the UE) CSI-RS - received signal strength indicator (CSI-RSSI), the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the total received power on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth. And measuring the received signal power CSI-RSRP of the CSI-RS configured by the serving cell for the UE (the measurement of the physical layer is based on a linear average of the power contributions of the CSI-RS on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth) ), the difference between the two (CRS-RSSI minus CSI-RSRP, called CSI-RSSI') is the interference strength measured by the macro UE, that is, the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, and may include signals from adjacent small cells. Power, and signal power from neighboring macro cells.

UE对物理层测量到的 CSI-RSSI'进行 L3 (层 3 ) 过滤, 或者对物理层 报告给 L3 的 CSI-RSSI和 CSI-RSRP分别进行过滤, 再用过滤后的值计算 CSI-RSSI,。 具体的过滤公式是: = (1 - , 其中, a = i/2(k 4) , Mn是来自物理层的最新测量结果, Fn是更新后的过滤后的测量结果, 是老的 (上一次)过滤后的测量结果。 宏基站还可以为 UE的测量配置测量 带宽, 并且不限于在系统带宽的中心 6个 RB上进行测量, 而是可以根据需 要(例如测量宏小区和小小区频谱交叠的部分)进行测量带宽的配置, 这不 仅可以支持宏小区与小小区同频的场景,还可以支持宏小区与小小区不同频 但频谱有部分交叠的场景。 步骤 804: 所述 UE基于所述 RE上第一下行信号的干扰强度, 确定是 否开启对非服务小区的测量, 若开启, 则执行步骤 805; 否则, 结束处理流 程。 The UE performs L3 (layer 3) filtering on the CSI-RSSI' measured by the physical layer, or filters the CSI-RSSI and CSI-RSRP reported by the physical layer to L3, and calculates the CSI-RSSI by using the filtered value. The specific filtering formula is: = (1 - , where a = i/ 2 (k 4) , M n is the latest measurement from the physical layer, and F n is the updated filtered result, which is old ( The last time) the filtered measurement result. The macro base station can also configure the measurement bandwidth for the measurement of the UE, and is not limited to the measurement on the center 6 RBs of the system bandwidth, but can be as needed (for example, measuring the macro cell and the small cell spectrum) The overlapping part is configured to measure the bandwidth, which can support not only the scenario where the macro cell and the small cell are at the same frequency, but also the scenario where the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies but the spectrum partially overlaps. Step 804: The UE determines whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell based on the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE. If yes, perform step 805; otherwise, end the processing flow.

如果 CSI-RSSI' 高于 (或大于等于)特定的门限, 则宏 UE启动对(同 频和 /或异频)相邻小区或小小区的测量, 否则宏 UE可以不测量相邻小区或 小小区。  If the CSI-RSSI' is higher (or greater than or equal to) a specific threshold, the macro UE initiates measurements on (same frequency and/or inter-frequency) neighboring cells or small cells, otherwise the macro UE may not measure neighboring cells or small Community.

以上基于 CSI-RSSI'的测量反映的是干扰强度或非服务小区的接收信号 强度,考虑到在无线资源管理中通常用于决策的是服务小区与相邻小区的信 号强度的相对值, 因此还可以定义信道状态信息参考信号接收质量 ( CSI-RSRQ ) 为信道状态信息参考信号接收功率 (CSI-RSRP, 物理层的测 量是基于所测带宽上的 CSI-RS对应的 RE上的 CSI-RS的功率贡献的线性平 均值) 与所述干扰强度 CSI-RSSI'的比值。 这个值反映了服务小区的信号功 率与干扰强度的比值, 因此, 既能反映 UE是否远离服务的宏小区, 也能反 映 UE是否靠近小小区。 因此, UE也可以基于上述定义的 CSI-RSRQ的测 量来控制对非服务小区的测量。 当 CSI-RSRQ低于(或小于等于)基站配置 的门限时, UE启动对非服务小区的测量, 否则 UE可以不测量非服务小区。  The above measurement based on CSI-RSSI' reflects the interference strength or the received signal strength of the non-serving cell. Considering the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell, which is usually used for decision making in radio resource management, The channel state information reference signal reception quality (CSI-RSRQ) may be defined as the channel state information reference signal received power (CSI-RSRP, and the physical layer measurement is based on the CSI-RS on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth. The linear average of the power contributions) is the ratio of the interference intensity CSI-RSSI'. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength. Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is far away from the serving macro cell, and can also reflect whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the measurement of the CSI-RSRQ defined above. When the CSI-RSRQ is lower than (or less than or equal to) the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell.

另夕卜,上面的判定条件是使用测量值与门限值的大小比较作为判定依据 (或者判断依据之一) 的, 这种方法可称为强度判定法。 此外, 也可以考虑 根据测量值的增量作为启动同频 /异频测量的判别条件, 这种方法称为增量 判定法。根据 CSI-RSSI'或 CSI-RSRQ在一定时间内的增量: 测得 CSI-RSSI' 增大意味着非服务小区信号 (或干扰信号) 强度增强, 如果 CSI-RSSI'持续 增强, 可能说明距离另一个小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动测量; 或者, CSI-RSRQ 的减小意味着干扰强度增加和 /或服务小区信号强度减小, 如果 CSI-RSRQ持续减小, 可能说明距离服务小区越来越远, 而距离相邻小区越 来越近, 可以考虑启动测量。 增量判定法和强度判定法也可以联合起来判别 是否启动非服务小区或小小区测量。  In addition, the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method. In addition, it is also conceivable to use the increment of the measured value as the discriminating condition for starting the same-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called the incremental decision method. According to CSI-RSSI' or CSI-RSRQ in a certain time increment: The measured CSI-RSSI' increase means that the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) strength is enhanced, if the CSI-RSSI' continues to increase, it may indicate the distance Another cell is getting closer and closer, and it is considered to initiate measurement; or, the decrease of CSI-RSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the signal strength of the serving cell decreases. If the CSI-RSRQ continues to decrease, it may indicate that the distance from the serving cell is more The farther it is, and the closer it is to the neighboring cell, the start of the measurement can be considered. The incremental decision method and the strength decision method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.

另一方面, 通常小小区发现的启动并不需要独自启动, 小小区发现可以 在非服务小区测量之中进行, 而对非服务小区的测量不仅需要考虑小小区发 现的需要, 也需要考虑在宏小区间的 UE移动性(例如切换)的需要, 为此,

Figure imgf000043_0001
On the other hand, usually the start of small cell discovery does not need to be started alone, small cell discovery can In the non-serving cell measurement, the measurement of the non-serving cell needs to consider not only the needs of small cell discovery, but also the need for UE mobility (such as handover) between macro cells.
Figure imgf000043_0001

所述联合判定准则包括: 将 CSI-RSSr或 CSI-RSRQ , 与 RSRP (基于 CRS的 ) 、 RSRQ或基于 CSI-RSRP的测量的至少两个联合起来控制对同频 /异频非服务小区(相邻小区)的测量。例如,方式 1 :如果 CSI-RSSI,>threshold, 或 RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 2: 当 CSI- SSI'>threshold, 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服 务小区的测量; 方式 3 : 如果 CSI-RSRQ<thresholdl , 或 RSRP小于某一基站 配置的门限,启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 4:如果 CSI- S Q<thresholdl , 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量。 如果测 量的启动只针对小小区发现, 也可以将 CSI-RSSI,、 CSI-RSRQ , RSRP (基 于 CRS的) 、 RSRQ、 CSI-RSRP中的至少两个联合起来控制对小小区的测 量, 具体的例子将上面的 4种方式中的条件判断的 "或" 关系改成 "且" 关 系就可以了。 用单个条件的判断准则, 在单个条件的判断准则满足时再执行联合判定准 则, 具体的例子如下: 首先或缺省采用基于 CRS的 RSRP的判定准则, 当 基于 CRS测量值 RSRP小于预定义的或基站配置的门限值时, 再执行联合 判定准则以通过新的测量 (例如 CSI-RSSI'或 CSI-RSRQ的测量) 来确定是 否启动同频或异频测量。 又例如, 特定传输模式下的 UE使用联合判定准则 进行测量控制。 基站也可以显示地或隐含地通过信令指示 UE执行联合判定 准则, 这些信令包括 adio Resource Control ( RRC ) 层 IE , MAC层控制元 control element, 物理层下行控制信息 ( downlink control information, 缩写 为 DCI ) 。  The joint decision criterion includes: combining CSI-RSSr or CSI-RSRQ with at least two of RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ or CSI-RSRP-based measurements to control a co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell (phase) Measurement of neighboring cells). For example, mode 1: if CSI-RSSI, >threshold, or RSRP is smaller than a threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of a non-serving cell; mode 2: when CSI-SSI'>threshold, or CSI-RSRP is smaller than a certain base station The configured threshold is used to initiate measurement on the non-serving cell. Mode 3: If CSI-RSRQ<threshold1, or RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 4: If CSI-SQ<thresholdl, Or the CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, and the measurement of the non-serving cell is started. If the initiation of the measurement is only for small cell discovery, at least two of CSI-RSSI, CSI-RSRQ, RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP may be combined to control measurement of the small cell, specifically The example changes the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four ways to the "and" relationship. Using a single conditional criterion, the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied. The specific examples are as follows: First or default, the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined or When the base station configures the threshold, the joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (for example, CSI-RSSI' or CSI-RSRQ measurement). For another example, UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control. The base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including adio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).

步驟 805 : UE开启对非服务小区的测量。  Step 805: The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.

具体启动对相邻小区 (或小小区)的测量的方式至少有以下两种: 方式 一, 服务基站已经为 UE配置了相邻小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 但该测量需 要等待 UE对具体条件的判定才能启动; 方式二, UE在判定满足 (基站配 置的)上报条件后向服务基站报告测量结果或发送特定的指示(例如强干扰 指示) , 基站根据测量结果或特定的指示(例如强干扰指示)进行相邻小区 (或小小区)的测量配置(和 /或测量的启动)。 这样, 可以使得宏 UE只有 在靠近小小区的局部区域才执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 在远离小小 区的大部分区域内都不需要执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 从而既减少 了由于测量导致的耗电和计算开销, 也能够及时的发现小小区并通过切换 / 分流到小小区或以小小区作为辅载波来提升服务质量(包括吞吐量), 减少 宏小区的负荷。 实施例七、 There are at least two ways to specifically initiate measurements on neighboring cells (or small cells): First, the serving base station has configured the measurement of the neighboring cell (or the small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to determine the specific condition to start; the second mode, after the UE determines that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, The serving base station reports the measurement result or sends a specific indication (for example, a strong interference indication), and the base station performs measurement configuration (and/or measurement start) of the neighboring cell (or small cell) according to the measurement result or a specific indication (for example, a strong interference indication). ). In this way, the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect small cells in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) by switching/diverting to small cells or using small cells as secondary carriers, reducing the load of macro cells. . Example VII.

步驟 901 : Macro Cell与小小区之间进行资源协调。 (这一步为可选) 在宏小区和小小区共存的场景中, 如果宏小区与小小区同频(中心频点 相同 ) 并且半帧边界对齐, 宏小区的 PSS/SSS与小小区的 PSS/SSS的时频 资源是对齐的, 则宏 UE测量到的干扰强度包括了小小区的同步信号功率, 而如果二者不同频或者半帧边界不对齐, 则宏小区的 PSS/SSS所占 RE可能 对应的是小小区的其它下行信号(例如数据区域), 为了保证测量的准确性 以及小小区的发现不受其负荷影响(即便在小小区低负荷或者无负荷时也可 以发现小小区 ), 最好通过某种方法让小小区在与宏小区的 PSS/SSS对应的 RE (由于 PSS/SSS在系统带宽的中心 6个 RB上传输, 因此也可以说 RB ) 上有下行信号发送, 例如小小区可以在与宏小区的 PSS/SSS对应的 6个 RB 上传输下行数据(通过相应的调度可以达到), 或者还可以传输第二下行同 步信号(有别于按照系统缺省配置传输的下行同步信号)。 宏小区与小小区 之间可以通过协调令小小区获知宏小区的 PSS/SSS对应的 RB, 这样的协调 可以通过 X2接口, S1接口, 或通过 OAM甚至 UE (不限于需要进行小小 区发现的 UE ) 进行。 以 X2 接口的协调为例, 宏小区可以通过 X2 Setup 流程消息 , ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向小小区指示宏小区 的 S S的配置信息 (宏小区还可以通过 handover preparation流程消息中携带 的基站间的 RRC信息例如 AS-Config将宏小区的 SS的配置信息通知小小 区) , 或者宏小区通过上述 X2消息向小小区推荐(小小区的) SS的配置信 息, 小小区接收到该配置信息后即可以对其自身的 SS进行配置, 以完成小 区间的协调。 反过来, 小小区也可以通过 X2 Setup 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向宏小区指示其 SS 的配置, 宏小区于是通过空口为 UE配置相应的 SS测量。 通过 S1接口或者 其它接口协调小区间的配置的方法包括, 宏基站通过 MME 和 /或网关 ( gateway,例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW )向对方基站传递 SS的配置或者推荐 SS 的配置, 和 /或, 小基站通过 MME和 /或网关 ( gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向宏基站传递 SS的配置或者推荐 SS的配置。 通过网管系统协调小区 间的配置的方法包括, 网管系统向宏基站指示 SS配置, 网管系统向小基站 指示 SS配置; 或者网管系统向宏基站发送小小区的 SS配置信息, 向小基 站发送宏小区的 SS配置信息。 通过 UE传递 macro和小小区间的配置具体 方式包括, 宏 UE在切换到小小区后将之前宏小区为其配置的 SS配置信息 发送给小小区, 或者, 小小区切换到宏小区后将之前小小区为其配置的 SS 配置信息发送给宏小区, 或者, 宏基站让 UE通过测量过程接收小小区的系 统信息, 其中包括 SS配置信息, 并由 UE上报给宏基站。 通过 UE上报的 相邻小 区配置信息的方式也可以称为 自 组织 /自 优化网络技术 ( self-organizing/self-optimization network ) 。 Step 901: Perform resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell. (This step is optional.) In the scenario where the macro cell and the small cell coexist, if the macro cell and the small cell have the same frequency (the same center frequency point) and the field boundaries are aligned, the PSS/SSS of the macro cell and the PSS of the small cell/ The time-frequency resources of the SSS are aligned, and the interference strength measured by the macro UE includes the synchronization signal power of the small cell, and if the two frequencies are different or the frame boundaries are not aligned, the PSS/SSS of the macro cell may occupy the RE. Corresponding to other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the small cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by its load (even when the small cell is under low load or no load, the small cell can be found), In a certain way, the small cell has a downlink signal (such as a small cell) on the RE corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the macro cell (since the PSS/SSS is transmitted on the center 6 RBs of the system bandwidth, so RB can also be said). The downlink data may be transmitted on 6 RBs corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the macro cell (which may be achieved by corresponding scheduling), or may also transmit the second downlink synchronization signal (different from the default according to the system) Set the downlink synchronization signal transmitted). Between the macro cell and the small cell, the small cell can be informed of the RB corresponding to the PSS/SSS of the macro cell, and the coordination can be performed through the X2 interface, the S1 interface, or through the OAM or even the UE (not limited to the UE that needs to perform small cell discovery). ) get on. Taking the coordination of the X2 interface as an example, the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message. The configuration information of the SS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the SS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell is small through the X2 message. The cell recommendation (small cell) configuration information of the SS, after receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own SS to complete the coordination between the cells. Conversely, the small cell can also indicate the configuration of its SS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setup flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message. The macro cell then configures the corresponding SS measurement for the UE through the air interface. The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes: the macro base station transmits the configuration of the SS or the configuration of the recommended SS to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW), and/or, The small base station transmits the configuration of the SS or the configuration of the recommended SS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW). The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates the SS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the SS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the SS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the macro cell to the small base station. SS configuration information. The specific mode of transmitting the macro between the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the SS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell and then small The SS configuration information of the cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the SS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station. The manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.

步驟 902: UE接收宏基站发来的第一下行信号的测量配置信息。  Step 902: The UE receives measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station.

宏基站首先为宏 UE进行测量配置, 在测量配置信息中可选包括 SS的 配置信息(干扰测量资源配置信息)。 测量配置信息中还包括用于控制是否 启动对非服务小区进行测量的门限参数(threshold ) 。 测量配置信息中还可 以包括用于过滤测量数值的参数信息 k。 宏 UE接收宏基站的无线链路重配 消息 ( RRCConnectionReconfiguration ) , 其中包括上述测量配置信息。 The macro base station first performs measurement configuration for the macro UE, and optionally includes configuration information of the SS (interference measurement resource configuration information) in the measurement configuration information. Measurement configuration information is also included to control whether Start the threshold parameter (threshold) for measuring the non-serving cell. The measurement configuration information may also include parameter information k for filtering the measured values. The macro UE receives a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration) of the macro base station, which includes the above measurement configuration information.

步驟 903: UE根据所述测量配置信息, 测量 SS (或干扰测量资源)对 应的 RE上的干扰强度。  Step 903: The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the SS (or the interference measurement resource) according to the measurement configuration information.

在宏小区和小小区共存的场景中, 宏 UE测量服务小区 (即宏小区) 的下行同步信号(包括主同步信号 PSS和辅同步信号 SSS, 也可以只测其中 一个)所对应的资源单元上的接收信号强度, 其中, 测量的接收信号为消除 掉服务小区的下行信号后的剩余信号。 换句话说, UE先对在同步信号资源 位置上接收到的信号基于服务小区的主同步和辅同步序列做干扰消除(采用 干扰消除接收机 IC receiver ) , 然后再测量剩下的信号的强度 ( Interference cancelled synchronization signal - received signal strength indicator, 缩写为 ICSS-RSSI, 物理层的测量是基于所测带宽上的 SS对应的 RE上的 IC消除 后的剩余信号总接收功率的线性平均值)。 这样,宏 UE测量到了干扰强度, 即非服务小区的接收信号强度, 可能包括来自相邻的小小区的信号功率, 以 及来自相邻的宏小区的信号功率。  In a scenario where the macro cell and the small cell coexist, the macro UE measures the downlink synchronization signal of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell) (including the primary synchronization signal PSS and the secondary synchronization signal SSS, and may also measure only one of the resource elements). The received signal strength, wherein the measured received signal is the residual signal after the downlink signal of the serving cell is cancelled. In other words, the UE first performs interference cancellation on the signal received at the synchronization signal resource location based on the primary synchronization and secondary synchronization sequences of the serving cell (using the interference cancellation receiver IC receiver), and then measures the strength of the remaining signals ( Interference recorded synchronization signal - received signal strength indicator, abbreviated as ICSS-RSSI, the measurement of the physical layer is based on the linear average of the total received power of the residual signal after IC cancellation on the RE corresponding to the SS over the measured bandwidth. Thus, the macro UE measures the interference strength, i.e., the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, possibly including the signal power from the neighboring small cells, and the signal power from the neighboring macro cells.

UE对物理层测量到的 ICSS-RSSI进行 L3 (层 3 ) 过滤。 具体的过滤公 式是: = (1 _ F„— 1 + · Μ„, 其中, a = i/2(k") , Mn是来自物理层的最新测量 结果, Fn是更新后的过滤后的测量结果, 是老的 (上一次) 过滤后的测 量结果。 The UE performs L3 (Layer 3) filtering on the ICSS-RSSI measured by the physical layer. The specific filter formula is: = (1 _ F„— 1 + · Μ„, where a = i /2 (k") , Mn is the latest measurement from the physical layer, F n is the updated filtered The measurement result is the old (previous) filtered measurement result.

步驟 904: 所述 UE基于所述 RE上第一下行信号的干扰强度, 确定是 否开启对非服务小区的测量, 若开启, 则执行步驟 905; 否则, 结束处理流 程。  Step 904: The UE determines, according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, execute step 905; otherwise, end the processing process.

基于过滤后的 ICSS-RSSI,宏 UE控制对非服务小区的测量。 具体来说, 如果 ICSS-RSSI>=threshold (或者 ICSS-RSSI>threshold也可以) , 则宏 UE 启动对 (同频和 /或异频) 相邻小区 (或非服务小区, 或小小区) 的测量, 否则宏 UE可以不测量同频和异频的非服务小区或小小区(也可以是其他制 式的非服务小区, 或小小区) 。 当宏 UE0离 picol和 pico2都比较远时, 测 得的 ICSS-RSSI可能会低于 threshold, 因此不会启动对非服务小区(或小小 区) 的测量(小小区的测量配置可能与非服务小区的测量配置相同, 也可能 不同); 而如果宏 UE1和宏 UE2分别靠近 icol和 ico2,测到的 ICSS-RSSI 由于包括了 pico的 PSS/SSS的功率 (也就是干扰强度) , 会相对较高, 并 且随着它们各自靠近 picol 和 pico2 , 会趋向于增大, 当它们各自测到的 ICSS-RSSI大于 threshold时, UE1、 UE2各自就会启动对非服务小区 (或小 小区)的测量,从而通过小区搜索发现并识别非服务小区或小小区(即 picol 或 pico2 ) 。 Based on the filtered ICSS-RSSI, the macro UE controls the measurement of the non-serving cell. Specifically, if ICSS-RSSI>=threshold (or ICSS-RSSI>threshold is also available), the macro UE initiates pair (same frequency and/or inter-frequency) neighboring cells (or non-serving cells, or small cells) measuring, Otherwise, the macro UE may not measure non-serving cells or small cells of the same frequency and different frequency (may also be non-serving cells of other standards, or small cells). When the macro UE0 is far away from picol and pico2, the measured ICSS-RSSI may be lower than the threshold, so the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be initiated (the measurement configuration of the small cell may be related to the non-serving cell) The measurement configuration is the same or different); and if macro UE1 and macro UE2 are close to ico and ico2 respectively, the measured ICSS-RSSI will be relatively high due to the power of the PSS/SSS including the pico (ie, the interference strength). And as they are close to picol and pico2, they tend to increase. When their respective measured ICSS-RSSI is greater than threshold, UE1 and UE2 each initiate measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell). Non-serving cells or small cells (ie picol or pico2) are discovered and identified by cell search.

以上基于 ICSS-RSSI的测量反映的是干扰强度,即非服务小区的接收信 号强度,考虑到在无线资源管理中通常用于决策的是服务小区与相邻小区的 信号 强度的相对值 ( 例如切换判 决 中 ) , 因 此还可以 定义 SSRQ=SSRP/ICSS-RSSI,其中 SSRQ ( synchronization signal received quality ) 为新定义的同步信号接收质量, SSRP ( synchronization signal received power ) 为同步信号接收功率(在非零功率 PSS/SSS所对应的 RE上测量, 物理层的 测量是基于所测带宽上的 SS对应的 RE上的同步信号功率贡献的线性平均 值) 。 这个值反映了服务小区的信号功率与干扰强度(非服务小区的信号强 度) 的比值, 因此, 既能反映 UE是否远离服务的宏小区, 也能反映 UE是 否靠近相邻小区或小小区。 因此, UE也可以基于上述定义的 SSRQ的测量 来控制对非服务小区或小小区的测量。 例如, 当 SSRQ低于基站配置的门限 时, UE启动对非服务小区或小小区的测量, 否则 UE可以不测量非服务小 区或小小区。  The above ICSS-RSSI-based measurement reflects the interference strength, that is, the received signal strength of the non-serving cell. Considering the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell, which is usually used for decision making in radio resource management (for example, switching) In the judgment), it is therefore also possible to define SSRQ=SSRP/ICSS-RSSI, where SSRQ (synchronization signal received quality) is the newly defined synchronization signal reception quality, SSRP (synchronization signal received power) is the synchronization signal reception power (at non-zero power) The measurement on the RE corresponding to the PSS/SSS is based on the linear average of the power contribution of the synchronization signal on the RE corresponding to the SS on the measured bandwidth. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength (signal strength of the non-serving cell). Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the neighboring cell or the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell based on the measurement of the SSRQ defined above. For example, when the SSRQ is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell or the small cell.

通常小小区发现的启动并不需要独自启动,小小区发现可以在非服务小 区测量之中进行, 而对非服务小区的测量不仅需要考虑小小区发现的需要, 也需要考虑在宏小区间的 UE移动性 (例如切换) 的需要, 为此, 可以釆用 联合判定准则, 即将 ICSS-RSSI或, SSRQ的测量与, RSRP (基于 CRS的) 或, RSRQ, SSRP 的测量联合起来控制对同频 /异频非服务小区 (相邻小区 或小小区) 的测量。 例如, 方式 1 : 如果 ICSS-RSSI>threshold, 或 RSRP小 于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 2 : 当 ICSS-RSSI>threshold, 或 SSRP小于某一门限 (可能由基站配置) , 启动对 非服务小区的测量; 方式 3: 如果 SSRQ<thresholdl , 或 RSRP小于某一基站 配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 4: 如果 SSRQ<thresholdl, 或 SSRP小于某一门限 (可能由基站配置) , 启动对非服务小区的测量。 如果 测量的启动只针对小小区发现, 也可以将 ICSS-RSSI或, SSRQ的测量与, RS P (基于 CRS的)或, RSRQ, SSRP的测量联合起来控制对小小区的测 量,具体来说的例子,将上面的 4种方式中的条件判断的 "或"关系改成"且" 关系就可以了。 用单个条件的判断准则, 在单个条件的判断准则满足时再执行联合判定准 则, 具体的例子如下: 首先或缺省采用基于 CRS的 RSRP的判定准则, 当 基于 CRS测量值 RSRP小于预定义的或基站配置的门限值时, 再执行联合 判定准则以通过新的测量(例如 ICSS-RSSI或 SSRQ的测量)来确定是否启 动同频或异频测量。 又例如, 特定传输模式下的 UE使用联合判定准则进行 测量控制。基站也可以显示地或隐含地通过信令指示 UE执行联合判定准则, 这些信令包括 Radio Resource Control ( RRC ) 层 IE, MAC层控制元 control element, 物理层下行控制信息 ( downlink control information, 缩写为 DCI )。 Generally, the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone, and small cell discovery can be performed in non-serving cell measurement, while the measurement of non-serving cells needs to consider not only the needs of small cell discovery but also the UE between macro cells. The need for mobility (such as handover), for which you can use joint decision criteria, ie, ICSS-RSSI or, SSRQ measurements, and RSRP (CRS-based) Or, RSRQ, SSRP measurements jointly control the measurement of co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cells (adjacent cells or small cells). For example, Mode 1: If ICSS-RSSI>threshold, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, initiate measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 2: When ICSS-RSSI>threshold, or SSRP is less than a certain threshold (possibly by base station (Configuration), initiate measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 3: If SSRQ<thresholdl, or RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 4: If SSRQ<thresholdl, or SSRP is smaller than a certain Threshold (possibly configured by the base station) to initiate measurements on non-serving cells. If the measurement is initiated only for small cell discovery, the measurement of ICSS-RSSI or SSRQ may be combined with the measurement of RS P (CRS based) or RSRQ, SSRP to control the measurement of small cells, specifically For example, it is sufficient to change the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four ways to the "and" relationship. Using a single conditional criterion, the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied. The specific examples are as follows: First or default, the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined or When the base station configures the threshold, the joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (such as the measurement of ICSS-RSSI or SSRQ). As another example, UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control. The base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).

另夕卜,上面的判定条件是使用测量值与门限值的大小比较作为判定依据 (或者判断依据之一) 的, 这种方法可称为强度判定法。 此外, 也可以考虑 根据测量值的增量作为启动同频 /异频测量的判别条件 (之一),这种方法称为 增量判定法。根据 ICSS-RSSI或 SSRQ在一定时间内的增量:测得 ICSS-RSSI 增大意味着非服务小区信号(或干扰信号)强度增强, 如果 ICSS-RSSI持续 增强, 可能说明距离另一个小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动测量等。 增量判定 法和强度判定法也可以联合起来判别是否启动非服务小区或小小区测量。 步驟 905: UE开启对非服务小区的测量。 In addition, the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method. In addition, it is also conceivable to use the increment of the measured value as one of the discriminating conditions for starting the intra-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called an incremental decision method. According to the ICSS-RSSI or SSRQ increment in a certain period of time: the measured ICSS-RSSI increase means that the strength of the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced. If the ICSS-RSSI continues to increase, it may indicate that the distance from another cell is coming. The closer you are, the more you can start measuring. The incremental decision method and the strength determination method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement. Step 905: The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.

启动对非服务小区(或小小区)的测量的方式至少有以下两种: 方式一, 月良务基站已经为 UE配置了非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 但该测量需要 等待 UE对具体条件的判定才能启动; 方式二, UE在判定满足(基站配置 的)上报条件后向服务基站报告测量结果或发送特定的指示(例如强干扰指 示),基站根据测量结果或接收到的特定的指示进行非服务小区(或小小区) 的测量配置(和 /或测量的启动)。 这样, 可以使得宏 UE只有在靠近小小区 的局部区域才执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 在远离小小区的大部分区 域内都不需要执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 从而既减少了由于测量导 致的耗电和计算开销, 也能够及时的发现小小区并通过切换 /分流到小小区 或以小小区作为辅载波来提升服务质量(包括吞吐量),减少宏小区的负荷。 实施例八、  There are at least two ways to start the measurement of the non-serving cell (or the small cell). In the first mode, the monthly service base station has configured the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to The determination of the specific condition can be started. In the second manner, after determining that the reporting condition is met (the configuration of the base station), the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (for example, a strong interference indication), and the base station determines the specific result according to the measurement result or the received Indicates the measurement configuration (and/or the start of the measurement) of the non-serving cell (or small cell). In this way, the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect the small cell in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) by switching/diverting to the small cell or using the small cell as the secondary carrier, reducing the load of the macro cell. . Example VIII.

步驟 1001 : Macro Cell与小小区之间进行资源协调。  Step 1001: Resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.

如果宏小区与小小区的 CRS时频资源是对齐的(即 CRS-colliding场景), 则宏 UE测量到的干扰强度将包括小小区的 CRS信号功率,而如果二者不对 齐, 则宏小区的 CRS所占 RE可能对应的是小小区的其它下行信号(例如数 据区域) , 为了保证测量的准确性以及小小区的发现不受其负荷影响(即便 在小小区低负荷或者无负荷时也可以发现小小区), 最好通过某种方法让小 小区在与宏小区的 CRS对应的 RE上有下行信号发送,例如小小区可以在与 (宏 UE所测带宽上的 )宏小区的 CRS对应的 RE上传输下行数据(通过相 应的调度可以达到) , 或者还可以传输第二 CRS信号 (有别于按照系统缺 省配置传输的 CRS )。宏小区与小小区之间可以通过协调令小小区获知宏小 区的 CRS对应的配置, 包括物理小区 ID ( PCI ) 、 端口数 (或端口号) 、 测量带宽 (例如测量带宽的中心频点和 RB数) , 可以通过 X2接口、 S1接 口、 通过网管 (OAM ) 甚至 UE (不限于需要进行小小区发现的 UE ) 进行 Macro Cell与小小区之间的资源协^。 以 X2 接口的协调为例, 宏小区可以通过 X2 Setup 流程消息 , ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向小小区指示宏小区 的 CRS的配置信息 (宏小区还可以通过 handover preparation流程消息中携 带的基站间的 RRC信息例如 AS-Config将宏小区的 CRS的配置信息通知小 小区) , 或者宏小区通过上述 X2消息向小小区推荐 (小小区的) CRS的配 置信息 , 小小区接收到该配置信息后即可以对其自身的 CRS进行配置, 以 完成小区间的协调。 反过来, 小小区也可以通过 X2 Setup流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向宏小区指示其 CRS 的配置, 宏小区于是通过空口为 UE配置相应的 CRS测量。 通过 S1接口或 者其它接口协调小区间的配置的方法包括, 宏基站通过 MME 和 /或网关If the CRS time-frequency resources of the macro cell and the small cell are aligned (ie, CRS-colliding scenario), the interference strength measured by the macro UE will include the CRS signal power of the small cell, and if the two are not aligned, the macro cell The RE of the CRS may correspond to other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the small cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by the load (even when the small cell is under load or no load) Small cell), preferably, the small cell has a downlink signal on the RE corresponding to the CRS of the macro cell, for example, the RE corresponding to the CRS of the macro cell of the macro cell (measured by the macro UE) The downlink data is transmitted (either by corresponding scheduling), or the second CRS signal (which is different from the CRS transmitted according to the system default configuration). The macro cell and the small cell can coordinate the configuration of the CRS corresponding to the macro cell by the small cell, including the physical cell ID (PCI), the number of ports (or port number), and the measurement bandwidth (for example, the center frequency of the measurement bandwidth and the RB). The number of resources between the Macro Cell and the small cell can be performed through the X2 interface, the S1 interface, the network management (OAM), or even the UE (not limited to the UE that needs to perform small cell discovery). Taking the coordination of the X2 interface as an example, the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message. The configuration information of the CRS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the CRS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell is small through the X2 message. The CRS configuration information of the cell recommendation (small cell), after receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own CRS to complete the coordination between the cells. Conversely, the small cell can also indicate the configuration of its CRS to the macro cell directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message. The macro cell then configures the corresponding CRS measurement for the UE through the air interface. A method for coordinating inter-cell configuration through an S1 interface or other interfaces includes: a macro base station through an MME and/or a gateway

( gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向对方基站传递 CRS的配置或者推荐 CRS的配置,和 /或,小基站通过 MME和 /或网关( gateway,例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向宏基站传递 CRS的配置或者推荐 CRS的配置。 通过网管系统协调 小区间的配置的方法包括, 网管系统向宏基站指示 CRS 配置, 网管系统向 小基站指示 CRS配置;或者网管系统向宏基站发送小小区的 CRS配置信息, 向小基站发送宏小区的 CRS配置信息。通过 UE传递 macro和小小区间的配 置具体方式包括, 宏 UE 在切换到小小区后将之前宏小区为其配置的 CRS 配置信息发送给小小区, 或者, 小小区切换到宏小区后将之前小小区为其配 置的 CRS配置信息发送给宏小区, 或者,宏基站让 UE通过测量过程接收小 小区的系统信息, 其中包括 CRS配置信息, 并由 UE上报给宏基站。 通过 UE 上报的相邻小区配置信息的方式也可以称为自组织 I自优化网络技术 ( self-organizing/self-optimization network ) 。 (gateway, for example, HeNB GW, S1 GW) delivers the configuration of the CRS or the configuration of the recommended CRS to the base station, and/or the small base station transmits the CRS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW) Configuration or recommend the configuration of the CRS. The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates the CRS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the CRS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the CRS configuration information of the small cell to the macro base station, and sends the macro cell to the small base station. CRS configuration information. The specific mode of transmitting the macro between the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the CRS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or the small cell switches to the macro cell and then small The CRS configuration information configured by the cell is sent to the macro cell, or the macro base station allows the UE to receive the system information of the small cell, including the CRS configuration information, and is reported by the UE to the macro base station. The manner in which the neighbor cell configuration information reported by the UE is also referred to as a self-organizing/self-optimization network.

步驟 1002: UE接收宏基站发来的测量配置信息。  Step 1002: The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.

这里, 所述测量配置信息包括: CRS的配置信息(干扰测量资源配置信 息) ; 所述 CRS的配置信息可能包括子帧配置信息、 CRS频域偏移量、 或 者与 CRS频域偏移量对应的物理小区标识 ( PCI, Physical Cell Identity ) ,Here, the measurement configuration information includes: CRS configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information); the CRS configuration information may include subframe configuration information, CRS frequency domain offset, or The physical cell identifier (PCI, Physical Cell Identity) corresponding to the CRS frequency domain offset,

CRS的配置信息还可以包括端口数或端口号。 The configuration information of the CRS may also include the port number or port number.

优选地, 所述测量配置信息还可以包括: 用于控制是否启动对非服务小 区进行测量的门限参数( threshold ) 、 以及用于过滤测量数值的参数信息 k。  Preferably, the measurement configuration information may further include: a threshold parameter (control) for controlling whether to start measurement on the non-serving cell, and parameter information k for filtering the measurement value.

宏基站为宏 UE的 CRS测量配置并非只能测量缺省的带宽,宏基站还可 以配置干扰强度测量的带宽, 该配置可以采用以下方法表示, 例如测量中心 频点 +带宽 (RB个数) , RB起始索引和结束索引, RB起始索引和 RB数, 等等。 这样, 即便宏小区与小小区不同频(即二者的中心频点不同) , 但只 要宏小区与小小区的频谱有交叠,则可以通过在交叠的带宽上的测量来判断 是否宏 UE靠近了异频的小小区, 从而启动对异频的小小区的测量。  The macro base station configures the CRS measurement of the macro UE not only to measure the default bandwidth, but also the macro base station can configure the bandwidth of the interference strength measurement. The configuration can be expressed by the following method, for example, measuring the center frequency + bandwidth (the number of RBs). RB start index and end index, RB start index and RB number, and so on. In this way, even if the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies (that is, the center frequency points of the two are different), as long as the spectrum of the macro cell and the small cell overlap, the macro UE can be determined by measurement on the overlapping bandwidth. Close to the small cell of the different frequency, thereby starting the measurement of the small cell with different frequency.

所述 UE接收宏基站发来的测量配置信息可以为: UE接收所述宏基站 通过无线链路重配消息 ( RRC Connection Reconfiguration )发来的测量配置 信息。  The receiving, by the UE, the measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station may be: receiving, by the UE, measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRC Connection Reconfiguration).

步驟 1003: UE根据所述测量配置信息, 测量 CRS (或干扰测量资源) 对应的 RE上的干扰强度。  Step 1003: The UE measures the interference strength on the RE corresponding to the CRS (or the interference measurement resource) according to the measurement configuration information.

在宏小区和小小区共存的场景中, 宏 UE测量服务小区 (即宏小区) 的 小区级参考信号 CRS所对应的资源单元上的接收信号强度, 其中, 测量的 接收信号为消除掉服务小区的 CRS 后的剩余信号。 换句话说, UE 先对在 CRS RE上接收到的信号基于服务小区的 CRS序列做干扰消除(采用干扰消 除接收机 IC receiver ) ,然后再测量剩下的信号的强度( Interference cancelled CRS - received signal strength indicator, 缩写为 IC-CRS-RSSI, 物理层的测量 是基于所测带宽上的 CRS对应的 RE上的对 CRS进行干扰消除后的剩余信 号的总接收功率的线性平均值) 。 这样, 宏 UE测量到了干扰强度, 即非服 务小区的接收信号强度, 可能包括来自相邻的小小区的信号功率, 以及来自 相邻的宏小区的信号功率。  In a scenario where the macro cell and the small cell coexist, the macro UE measures the received signal strength on the resource unit corresponding to the cell level reference signal CRS of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell), where the measured received signal is used to eliminate the serving cell. Remaining signal after CRS. In other words, the UE first performs interference cancellation based on the CRS sequence of the serving cell for the signal received on the CRS RE (using the interference cancellation receiver IC receiver), and then measures the strength of the remaining signal (Interference cancelled CRS - received signal). The strength indicator, abbreviated as IC-CRS-RSSI, is based on the linear average of the total received power of the residual signal after interference cancellation on the CRS corresponding to the CRS on the measured bandwidth. Thus, the macro UE measures the interference strength, i.e., the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, possibly including the signal power from the adjacent small cell, and the signal power from the adjacent macro cell.

UE对物理层测量到的 IC-CRS-RSSI进行 L3 (层 3 )过滤。 具体的过滤 公式是: = (1 - ")·υ" · , 其中, a = l/2(k/4), Mn是来自物理层的最新测 量结果, Fn是更新后的过滤后的测量结果, Fn_i是上一次过滤后的测量结果。 The UE performs L3 (Layer 3) filtering on the IC-CRS-RSSI measured by the physical layer. Specific filtering The formula is: = (1 - ")·υ" · , where a = l/2( k/4) , M n is the latest measurement from the physical layer, and F n is the updated filtered result. F n _i is the measurement result after the last filter.

步驟 1004: 所述 UE基于 CRS RE上测量到的干扰强度, 确定是否开启 对非服务小区的测量, 若开启, 则执行步驟 1005; 否则, 结束处理流程。  Step 1004: The UE determines, according to the interference strength measured on the CRS RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, execute step 1005; otherwise, end the processing flow.

具体来说, 如果 IC-CRS-RSSI>=threshold (或者 IC-CRS-RSSI>threshold 也可以) , 则宏 UE启动对非服务小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 否则宏 UE可 以不测量同频和异频的非服务小区或小小区(也可以是其他制式的非服务小 区,或小小区)。如果宏 UE0离 picol和 pico2都比较远,测得的 IC-CRS-RSSI 可能会低于 threshold, 因此不会启动对非服务小区 (或小小区)的测量(小 小区的测量配置可能与非服务小区的测量配置相同, 也可能不同) ; 而宏 UE1和宏 UE2如果分别靠近 picol和 pico2, 测到的 IC-CRS-RSSI由于包括 了 pico的 CRS的功率 (也就是干扰强度) , 会相对较高, 并且随着它们各 自靠近 picol和 pico2, 会趋向于增大, 当它们各自测到的 IC-CRS-RSSI大 于 threshold时, UE1、 UE2各自就会启动对非服务小区(或小小区 )的测量, 从而通过小区搜索发现并识别非服务小区或小小区 (即 picol或 pico2 ) 。  Specifically, if the IC-CRS-RSSI>=threshold (or IC-CRS-RSSI>threshold is also possible), the macro UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell), otherwise the macro UE may not measure the same frequency. And a non-serving cell or a small cell of an inter-frequency (may also be a non-serving cell of another standard, or a small cell). If the macro UE0 is far away from picol and pico2, the measured IC-CRS-RSSI may be lower than the threshold, so the measurement of the non-serving cell (or small cell) will not be initiated (the measurement configuration of the small cell may be non-serving) The measurement configuration of the cell is the same or different); and if macro UE1 and macro UE2 are close to picol and pico2 respectively, the measured IC-CRS-RSSI will be relatively high due to the power of the CRS including the pico (that is, the interference strength). And as they are close to picol and pico2, they tend to increase. When their respective measured IC-CRS-RSSI is greater than threshold, UE1 and UE2 each initiate a non-serving cell (or small cell). Measured to discover and identify non-serving cells or small cells (ie picol or pico2) by cell search.

以上基于 IC-CRS-RSSI 的测量反映的是干扰强度即非服务小区的接收 信号强度,考虑到在无线资源管理中通常用于决策的是服务小区与相邻小区 的信号强度的相对值(例如切换判决中), 因此还可以定义 RSRQ, =RSRP/ IC-CRS-RSSI, 其中 RSRQ, 为新定义的参考信号接收质量。 这个值反映了 服务小区的信号功率与干扰强度(非服务小区的信号强度) 的比值, 因此, 既能反映 UE是否远离服务的宏小区,也能反映 UE是否靠近小小区。 因此, UE也可以基于上述定义的 RSRQ' 的测量来控制对非服务小区或小小区的 测量。 例如, 当 RSRQ' 低于基站配置的门限时, UE启动对非服务小区或 小小区的测量, 否则 UE可以不测量非服务小区或小小区。  The above IC-CRS-RSSI-based measurement reflects the interference strength, that is, the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, considering that the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell is usually used for decision making in radio resource management (for example, In the handover decision), it is therefore also possible to define RSRQ, =RSRP/IC-CRS-RSSI, where RSRQ is the newly defined reference signal reception quality. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength (the signal strength of the non-serving cell). Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell based on the measurement of the RSRQ' defined above. For example, when the RSRQ' is lower than the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell or the small cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell or the small cell.

通常小小区发现的启动并不需要独自启动,小小区发现可以在非服务小 区测量之中进行, 而对非服务小区的测量不仅需要考虑小小区发现的需要, 也需要考虑在宏小区间的 UE移动性 (例如切换) 的需要, 为此, 可以采用 联合判定准则, 即将 IC-CRS-RSSIZP-CSI-RSSI或, RSRQ'CSI-RSRQ的测 量与, RSRP (基于 CRS 的) , RSRQ, 或基于 CSI-RSRP的测量联合起来 控制对同频 /异频非服务小区 (相邻小区) 的测量。 例如, 方式 1 : 如果 IC-CRS- SSI ZP-CSI-RSSI>threshold, 或 RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 2: 当 IC-CRS-RSSI ZP-CSI- SSI>threshold, 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 3: 如果 RSRQ, CSI-RS Q<thresholdl, 或 RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启 动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 4: 如果 RSRQ, CSI- S Q<thresholdl , 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量。 如果测量 的启动只针对小小区发现, 也可以将 IC-CRS-RSSIZP-CRS-RSSI 或, RSRQ'RSRQ*的测量与, RSRP (基于 CRS的)或基于,或 CSI-RSRP的测量 联合起来控制对小小区的测量, 具体来说, 将上面的 4种方式中的条件判断 的 "或" 关系改成 "且" 关系就可以了。 用单个条件的判断准则, 在单个条件的判断准则满足时再执行联合判定准 则, 具体的例子如下: 首先或缺省采用基于 CRS的 RSRP的判定准则, 当 基于 CRS测量值 RSRP小于预定义的或基站配置的门限值时, 再执行联合 判定准则以通过新的测量 (例如 IC-CRS-RSSI或 RSRQ,的测量) 来确定是 否启动同频或异频测量。 又例如, 特定传输模式下的 UE使用联合判定准则 进行测量控制。 基站也可以显示地隐含地通过信令指示 UE执行联合判定准 则,这些信令包括 Radio Resource ControK RRC )层 IE, MAC层控制元 control element, 物理层下行控制信息 ( downlink control information, 缩写为 DCI )。 Generally, the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone, the small cell discovery can be performed in the non-serving cell measurement, and the measurement of the non-serving cell not only needs to consider the needs of small cell discovery, It is also necessary to consider the need for UE mobility (e.g., handover) between macro cells. To this end, a joint decision criterion, that is, measurement of IC-CRS-RSSIZP-CSI-RSSI or RSRQ'CSI-RSRQ, RSRP ( CRS-based, RSRQ, or CSI-RSRP-based measurements jointly control the measurement of co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cells (adjacent cells). For example, mode 1: if the IC-CRS-SSI ZP-CSI-RSSI>threshold, or the RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, initiate measurement of the non-serving cell; mode 2: when IC-CRS-RSSI ZP-CSI- SSI>threshold, or CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, and starts measurement of the non-serving cell; Mode 3: If RSRQ, CSI-RS Q<thresholdl, or RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, start the right Measurement of the serving cell; Mode 4: If the RSRQ, CSI-SQ<threshold1, or CSI-RSRP is less than the threshold configured by a certain base station, the measurement of the non-serving cell is initiated. If the measurement is initiated only for small cell discovery, the measurement of IC-CRS-RSSIZP-CRS-RSSI or RSRQ'RSRQ* can also be combined with RSRP (CRS-based) or based, or CSI-RSRP-based measurements. For the measurement of the small cell, specifically, the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four methods is changed to the "and" relationship. Using a single conditional criterion, the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied. The specific examples are as follows: First or default, the CRS-based RSRP decision criterion is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is smaller than the predefined or When the base station is configured with a threshold, a joint decision criterion is executed to determine whether to initiate the same or different frequency measurement by a new measurement (for example, measurement of IC-CRS-RSSI or RSRQ). As another example, UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control. The base station may also implicitly indicate to the UE to perform joint determination criteria by signaling, including the Radio Resource ControK RRC layer IE, the MAC layer control element control element, and the downlink control information (abbreviated as DCI). ).

另外,上面的判定条件是使用测量值与门限值的大小比较作为判定依据 (或者判断依据之一) 的, 这种方法可称为强度判定法。 此外, 也可以考虑 根据测量值的增量作为启动同频 /异频测量的判别条件 (之一),这种方法称为 增量判定法。 根据 IC-CRS-RSSI 在一定时间内的增量: 测得 IC-CRS-RSSI 增大意味着非服务小区信号 (或干扰信号) 强度增强, 如果 IC-CRS-RSSI 持续增强, 可能说明距离另一个小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动测量等。 增量 判定法和强度判定法也可以联合起来判别是否启动非服务小区或小小区测 量。 In addition, the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method. In addition, it is also conceivable to use the increment of the measured value as one of the discriminating conditions for starting the intra-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called an incremental decision method. Incremental over a certain period of time based on IC-CRS-RSSI: IC-CRS-RSSI measured The increase means that the strength of the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced. If the IC-CRS-RSSI continues to increase, it may indicate that it is getting closer and closer to another cell, and it may be considered to start measurement and the like. The incremental decision method and the strength determination method can also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.

步驟 1005: UE开启对非服务小区的测量。  Step 1005: The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.

具体启动对相邻小区 (或小小区)的测量的方式至少有以下两种: 方式 一, 服务基站已经为 UE配置了相邻小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 但该测量需 要等待 UE对具体条件的判定才能启动; 方式二, UE在判定满足 (基站配 置的)上报条件后向服务基站报告测量结果或发送特定的指示(例如强干扰 指示) , 基站根据测量结果或特定的指示(例如强干扰指示)进行相邻小区 (或小小区) 的测量配置(和 /或测量的启动) 。 这样, 可以使得宏 UE只有 在靠近小小区的局部区域才执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 在远离小小 区的大部分区域内都不需要执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 从而既减少 了由于测量导致的耗电和计算开销, 也能够及时的发现小小区并通过切换 / 分流到小小区或以小小区作为辅载波来提升服务质量(包括吞吐量) , 减少 宏小区的负荷。 实施例九、  The method for specifically starting the measurement on the neighboring cell (or the small cell) is as follows: In the first mode, the serving base station has configured the measurement of the neighboring cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to specifically The determination of the condition can be started. In the second mode, the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (such as a strong interference indication) after determining that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, and the base station according to the measurement result or a specific indication (for example, strong) Interference indication) Perform measurement configuration (and/or start of measurement) of a neighboring cell (or small cell). In this way, the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect small cells in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) and reduce the load of the macro cell by switching/diverting to small cells or using small cells as secondary carriers. . Example IX.

步驟 1101 : Macro Cell与小小区之间进行资源协调。  Step 1101: Resource coordination between the Macro Cell and the small cell.

如果宏小区与小小区的 CSI-RS时频资源是对齐的(即 CSI-RS-colliding 场景) , 则宏 UE测量到的干扰强度包括了小小区的 CSI-RS信号功率, 而 如果二者不对齐, 则宏小区的 CSI-RS所占 RE可能对应的是小小区的其它 下行信号(例如数据区域) , 为了保证测量的准确性以及小小区的发现不受 其负荷影响(即便在小小区低负荷或者无负荷时也可以发现小小区) , 最好 通过某种方法让小小区在与宏小区的 CSI-RS对应的 RE上有下行信号发送, 例如小小区可以在与宏小区的 CSI-RS对应的 RE上传输下行数据 (通过相 应的调度可以达到) 或者伪数据 ( dummy RE ) 。 宏小区与小小区之间可以 通过协调令小小区获知宏小区的 CSI-RS 及测量相关的配置, 包括 CSI-RS 子帧配置信息, 测量带宽 (例如测量带宽的中心频点和 RB数) , 这样的协 调可以通过 X2/S1接口 (例如通过 X2 setup过程或者 eNB配置更新过程或 者其它 X2/S1信令过程) 进行或者网管系统甚至 UE (不限于需要进行小小 区发现的 UE ) 进行。 If the CSI-RS time-frequency resources of the macro cell and the small cell are aligned (ie, CSI-RS-colliding scenario), the interference strength measured by the macro UE includes the CSI-RS signal power of the small cell, and if the two are not Alignment, the CSI-RS occupied by the macro cell may correspond to other downlink signals (such as data areas) of the small cell, in order to ensure the accuracy of the measurement and the discovery of the small cell is not affected by the load (even in the small cell) A small cell may also be found when the load is loaded or not, and the small cell is preferably sent by a downlink signal on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS of the macro cell. For example, the small cell may be in the CSI-RS with the macro cell. The corresponding RE transmits downlink data (which can be reached by corresponding scheduling) or dummy data (dummy RE). Between the macro cell and the small cell Coordinating the small cell to know the CSI-RS and measurement related configuration of the macro cell, including the CSI-RS subframe configuration information, and measuring the bandwidth (for example, the center frequency and the number of RBs of the measurement bandwidth), such coordination can be performed by X2/S1 The interface is performed (for example, by an X2 setup procedure or an eNB configuration update procedure or other X2/S1 signaling procedure) or by a network management system or even a UE (not limited to a UE requiring small cell discovery).

以 X2 接口的协调为例, 宏小区可以通过 X2 Setup 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接 或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向小小区指示宏小区 的 CSI-RS的配置信息 (宏小区还可以通过 handover preparation流程消息中 携带的基站间的 RRC信息例如 AS-Config将宏小区的 CSI-RS的配置信息通 知小小区) , 或者宏小区通过上述 X2消息向小小区推荐 (小小区的) 非零 功率 CSI-RS的配置信息, 小小区接收到该配置信息后即可以对其自身的非 零功率 CSI-RS进行配置, 以完成小区间的协调。 反过来, 小小区也可以通 过 X2 Setup 流程消息, ENB Configuration Update 流程消息, 或者 Load Information消息等 X2消息直接或间接 (通过 X2网关或代理 X2 gateway, X2 proxy ) 向宏小区指示其非零功率 CSI-RS的配置, 宏小区于是通过空口 为 UE配置相应的 CSI-RS测量。通过 S 1接口或者其它接口协调小区间的配 置的方法包括, 宏基站通过 MME和 /或网关 (gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向对方基站传递 CSI-RS的配置或者推荐非零功率 CSI-RS的配置, 和 /或, 小基站通过 MME和 /或网关 ( gateway, 例如 HeNB GW,S1 GW ) 向宏 基站传递非零功率 CSI-RS的配置或者推荐宏基站 CSI-RS的配置。 通过网 管系统协调小区间的配置的方法包括,网管系统向宏基站指示 CSI-RS配置, 网管系统向小基站指示非零功率 CSI-RS配置; 或者网管系统向宏基站发送 小小区的非零功率 CSI-RS配置信息, 向小基站发送宏小区的 CSI-RS配置 信息。 通过 UE传递 macro和小小区间的配置具体方式包括, 宏 UE在切换 到小小区后将之前宏小区为其配置的 CSI-RS配置信息发送给小小区,或者, 小小区切换到宏小区后将之前小小区为其配置的非零功率 CSI-RS配置信息 发送给宏小区, 或者, 宏基站让 UE通过测量过程接收小小区的系统信息, 其中包括非零功率 CSI-RS配置信息, 并由 UE上报给宏基站。 Taking the coordination of the X2 interface as an example, the macro cell can directly or indirectly (through the X2 gateway or the proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) to indicate the macro to the small cell through an X2 Setup flow message, an ENB Configuration Update flow message, or an X2 message such as a Load Information message. The configuration information of the CSI-RS of the cell (the macro cell may also notify the small cell of the configuration information of the CSI-RS of the macro cell by using the RRC information between the base stations carried in the handover preparation flow message, for example, AS-Config), or the macro cell passes the above The X2 message recommends the configuration information of the non-zero-power CSI-RS to the small cell (small cell). After receiving the configuration information, the small cell can configure its own non-zero-power CSI-RS to complete the inter-cell coordination. . Conversely, the small cell can also indicate its non-zero power CSI to the macro cell either directly or indirectly (via X2 gateway or proxy X2 gateway, X2 proxy) through X2 Setup flow message, ENB Configuration Update flow message, or Load Information message. - The configuration of the RS, the macro cell then configures the corresponding CSI-RS measurement for the UE through the air interface. The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration through the S1 interface or other interfaces includes the macro base station transmitting the CSI-RS configuration or recommending the non-zero power CSI to the opposite base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW). The configuration of the RS, and/or the small base station transmits the configuration of the non-zero power CSI-RS or the configuration of the recommended macro base station CSI-RS to the macro base station through the MME and/or the gateway (eg, HeNB GW, S1 GW). The method for coordinating the inter-cell configuration by the network management system includes: the network management system indicates the CSI-RS configuration to the macro base station, and the network management system indicates the non-zero power CSI-RS configuration to the small base station; or the network management system sends the non-zero power of the small cell to the macro base station. The CSI-RS configuration information is used to send CSI-RS configuration information of the macro cell to the small base station. The specific mode of transmitting the macro and the small cell by the UE includes: after the handover to the small cell, the macro UE sends the CSI-RS configuration information configured by the previous macro cell to the small cell, or after the small cell switches to the macro cell, Non-zero power CSI-RS configuration information previously configured by the small cell The macro base station is configured to receive the system information of the small cell, including the non-zero power CSI-RS configuration information, and report the information to the macro base station.

在一个大范围的无线接入网络内,还可以通过大范围的协调来提高小小 区发现的性能,例如使多个 macro小区(组成一个协调的发现区域)的 CSI-RS 对应的 RE对齐 (宏小区间可以通过 X2/S1接口或网管等方式传递 CSI-RS 配置信息) , 服务的宏基站还可以为 UE配置相邻宏基站的 CSI-RS信息, 从而使得 UE测量干扰强度时将包括服务的宏基站以及相邻的宏基站的信号 功率都消除掉 (或者使服务小区的 CSI-RS对应的其它相邻宏小区的零功率 CSI- S, 这样 UE只需要消除掉服务小区的 CSI-RS信号就可以了 ) , 从而 使干扰强度只反映小小区的功率强度, 这可以提高启动小小区测量的准确 性。  In a large-scale radio access network, the performance of small cell discovery can also be improved through a large-scale coordination, for example, aligning REs corresponding to CSI-RSs of multiple macro cells (constituting a coordinated discovery area) (macro The small-area may transmit CSI-RS configuration information through an X2/S1 interface or a network management system. The serving macro base station may also configure CSI-RS information of the neighboring macro base station for the UE, so that the UE will include the service when measuring the interference strength. The signal power of the macro base station and the adjacent macro base station are eliminated (or the zero-power CSI-S of other neighboring macro cells corresponding to the CSI-RS of the serving cell, so that the UE only needs to eliminate the CSI-RS signal of the serving cell. It is ok), so that the interference intensity only reflects the power intensity of the small cell, which can improve the accuracy of starting the small cell measurement.

步骤 1102: UE接收宏基站发来的测量配置信息。  Step 1102: The UE receives measurement configuration information sent by the macro base station.

这里, 测量配置信息包括第一下行信号的测量配置信息(干扰测量资源 配置信息) , 其中, 第一下行信号为非零功率 CSI-RS, 所述第一下行信号 的测量配置信息包括: 非零功率 CSI-RS资源配置标识 ( CSI-RS-Id tityNZP ) 、 资源配置信息 ( resourceConfig ) 、 子帧配置信息 ( subframeConfig ) 、 天线端口数 ( antennaPortsCount ) 、 扰码标识 ( scramblingldentity ) 、 与 CRS 的准共址信息 ( qcl-CRS-Info ) 。 测量配置信息还包括用于控制是否启动对非服务小区进行测 量的启动测量门限值 ( threshold ) , 和 /或用于过滤测量数值的参数信息 k。  Here, the measurement configuration information includes measurement configuration information (interference measurement resource configuration information) of the first downlink signal, where the first downlink signal is a non-zero power CSI-RS, and the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal includes : non-zero power CSI-RS resource configuration identifier (CSI-RS-Id tityNZP), resource configuration information (resourceConfig), subframe configuration information (frameConfig), antenna port number (antennaPortsCount), scrambling code identification (scramblingldentity), and CRS Quasi-co-location information (qcl-CRS-Info). The measurement configuration information also includes a start measurement threshold (threshold) for controlling whether to initiate measurement for the non-serving cell, and/or parameter information k for filtering the measured value.

所述宏基站下发的第一下行信号的测量配置信息可以为:宏基站通过无 线链路重配消息( RRCConnectionReconfiguration )下发第一下行信号的测量 配置信息。  The measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station may be: the macro base station sends the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal by using a radio link reconfiguration message (RRCConnectionReconfiguration).

宏基站还可以为 UE的测量配置测量带宽, 并且不限于在系统带宽的中 心 6个 RB上进行测量, 而是可以根据需要(例如测量宏小区和小小区频谱 交叠的部分)进行测量带宽的配置, 这不仅可以支持宏小区与小小区同频的 场景, 还可以支持宏小区与小小区不同频但频谱有部分交叠的场景。  The macro base station may also configure the measurement bandwidth for the measurement configuration of the UE, and is not limited to performing measurement on the center 6 RBs of the system bandwidth, but may perform measurement bandwidth according to requirements (for example, measuring a portion where the macro cell and the small cell spectrum overlap). Configuration, which can support not only the scenario where the macro cell and the small cell are at the same frequency, but also the scenario where the macro cell and the small cell have different frequencies but the spectrum partially overlaps.

步驟 1103: UE根据所述测量配置信息,测量 CSI-RS (或干扰测量资源) 对应的 RE上的干扰强度。 Step 1103: The UE measures a CSI-RS (or an interference measurement resource) according to the measurement configuration information. The interference strength on the corresponding RE.

在宏小区和小小区共存的场景中, 宏基站为 UE配置用于 CSI-RSRP和 CSI-RSSI测量的参数, 包括 CSI-RS的子帧配置信息。 宏 UE测量服务小区 (即宏小区) 的信道状态信息参考信号 CSI-RS 所对应的资源单元 (由 UE 接收所在服务小区的宏基站下发的第一下行信号的测量配置信息所指示)上 的接收信号强度, 其中, 测量的接收信号为消除掉服务小区的 CSI-RS后的 剩余信号。 换句话说, UE先对在 CSI-RS RE上接收到的信号基于服务小区 的 CSI-RS序列做干扰消除 (釆用干扰消除接收机 IC receiver ) , 然后再测 量剩下的信号的强度 ( Interference cancelled CSI-RS - received signal strength indicator, 缩写为 IC-CSI-RSSI, 物理层的测量是基于所测带宽上的 CSI-RS 对应的 RE上的对 CSI-RS进行干扰消除后的剩余信号的总功率的线性平均 值) 。 这样, 宏 UE测量到了非服务小区的接收信号强度, 可能包括来自相 邻的小小区的信号功率, 以及来自相邻的宏小区的信号功率。  In a scenario where the macro cell and the small cell coexist, the macro base station configures parameters for CSI-RSRP and CSI-RSSI measurement for the UE, including subframe configuration information of the CSI-RS. The macro UE measures the resource unit corresponding to the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS of the serving cell (ie, the macro cell) (indicated by the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal sent by the macro base station of the serving cell of the UE) The received signal strength, wherein the measured received signal is the residual signal after the CSI-RS of the serving cell is cancelled. In other words, the UE first performs interference cancellation based on the CSI-RS sequence of the serving cell based on the signal received on the CSI-RS RE (using the interference cancellation receiver IC receiver), and then measures the strength of the remaining signals (Interference). The received CSI-RS - received signal strength indicator, abbreviated as IC-CSI-RSSI, is based on the total of the residual signals after interference cancellation on the CSI-RS on the RE corresponding to the CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth. Linear average of power). Thus, the macro UE measures the received signal strength of the non-serving cell, possibly including the signal power from the adjacent small cell, and the signal power from the adjacent macro cell.

UE对物理层测量到的 IC-CSI-RSSI进行 L3 (层 3 ) 过滤。 具体的过滤 公式是: = (1 _ ") — 其中, a = J^, M„是来自物理层的最新测量 结果, 是更新后的过滤后的测量结果, 是上一次过滤后的测量结果。 The UE performs L3 (Layer 3) filtering on the IC-CSI-RSSI measured by the physical layer. The specific filtering formula is: = (1 _ ") - where a = J^, M„ is the latest measurement from the physical layer, is the filtered filtered result, and is the last filtered result.

步驟 1104: 所述 UE基于所述 RE上第一下行信号的干扰强度, 确定是 否开启对非服务小区的测量, 若开启, 则执行步驟 1105; 否则, 结束处理 流程。  Step 1104: The UE determines, according to the interference strength of the first downlink signal on the RE, whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell. If yes, execute step 1105; otherwise, end the processing flow.

如果 IC-CSI-RSSI 高于(或大于等于)特定的门限,则宏 UE启动对(同 频和 /或异频) 相邻小区的测量, 否则宏 UE可以不测量相邻小区。  If the IC-CSI-RSSI is above (or greater than or equal to) a particular threshold, the macro UE initiates measurements on (co-frequency and/or inter-frequency) neighbor cells, otherwise the macro UE may not measure neighbor cells.

以上基于 IC-CSI-RSSI的测量反映的是干扰强度或非服务小区的接收信 号强度,考虑到在无线资源管理中通常用于决策的是服务小区与相邻小区的 信号强度的相对值, 因此还可以定义信道状态信息参考信号接收质量 ( CSI-RSRQ ) 为信道状态信息参考信号接收功率 (CSI-RSRP, 物理层的测 量是基于所测带宽上的 CSI-RS对应的 RE上的 CSI-RS的功率贡献的线性平 均值)与所述干扰强度 IC-CSI-RSSI的比值。 这个值反映了服务小区的信号 功率与干扰强度的比值, 因此, 既能反映 UE是否远离服务的宏小区, 也能 反映 UE是否靠近小小区。 因此, UE也可以基于上述定义的 CSI-RSRQ的 测量来控制对非服务小区的测量。 当 CSI-RSRQ低于(或小于等于)基站配 置的门限时, UE启动对非服务小区的测量, 否则 UE可以不测量非服务小 区。 The above measurement based on IC-CSI-RSSI reflects the interference strength or the received signal strength of the non-serving cell. Considering the relative value of the signal strength of the serving cell and the neighboring cell, which is usually used for decision making in radio resource management, It is also possible to define channel state information reference signal reception quality (CSI-RSRQ) as channel state information reference signal reception power (CSI-RSRP, and physical layer measurement is based on CSI-RS on RE corresponding to CSI-RS on the measured bandwidth) Linear contribution of power contribution Mean) The ratio of the interference intensity IC-CSI-RSSI. This value reflects the ratio of the signal power of the serving cell to the interference strength. Therefore, it can reflect whether the UE is away from the serving macro cell or whether the UE is close to the small cell. Therefore, the UE can also control the measurement of the non-serving cell based on the measurement of the CSI-RSRQ defined above. When the CSI-RSRQ is lower than (or less than or equal to) the threshold configured by the base station, the UE initiates measurement of the non-serving cell, otherwise the UE may not measure the non-serving cell.

另夕卜,上面的判定条件是使用测量值与门限值的大小比较作为判定依据 (或者判断依据之一) 的, 这种方法可称为强度判定法。 此外, 也可以考虑 根据测量值的增量作为启动同频 /异频测量的判别条件, 这种方法称为增量 判定法。 根据 IC-CSI-RSSI 或 CSI-RSRQ 在一定时间内的增量: 测得 IC-CSI- SSI 增大意味着非服务小区信号 (或干扰信号) 强度增强, 如果 IC-CSI-RSSI持续增强, 可能说明距离另一个小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动 测量; 或者, CSI-RSRQ的减小意味着干扰强度增加和 /或服务小区信号强度 减小, 如果 CSI-RSRQ持续减小, 可能说明距离服务小区越来越远, 而距离 相邻小区越来越近, 可以考虑启动测量。 增量判定法和强度判定法也可以联 合起来判别是否启动非服务小区或小小区测量。  In addition, the above determination condition is that the comparison between the measured value and the threshold value is used as a determination basis (or one of the judgment criteria), and this method may be referred to as an intensity determination method. In addition, it is also conceivable to use the increment of the measured value as the discriminating condition for starting the same-frequency/inter-frequency measurement. This method is called the incremental decision method. Incremental over a certain period of time according to IC-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ: The measured increase in IC-CSI-SSI means that the strength of the non-serving cell signal (or interference signal) is enhanced, if the IC-CSI-RSSI continues to increase, It may be that the distance is closer and closer to another cell, and the measurement may be considered; or, the decrease of CSI-RSRQ means that the interference strength increases and/or the signal strength of the serving cell decreases. If the CSI-RSRQ continues to decrease, the distance may be indicated. The serving cell is getting farther and farther, and getting closer and closer to the neighboring cell, you can consider starting the measurement. The incremental decision method and the strength decision method may also be combined to determine whether to initiate non-serving cell or small cell measurement.

另一方面, 通常小小区发现的启动并不需要独自启动, 小小区发现可以 在非服务小区测量之中进行, 而对非服务小区的测量不仅需要考虑小小区发 现的需要, 也需要考虑在宏小区间的 UE移动性(例如切换)的需要, 为此,

Figure imgf000058_0001
On the other hand, usually the initiation of small cell discovery does not need to be initiated alone, the small cell discovery can be performed in the non-serving cell measurement, and the measurement of the non-serving cell not only needs to consider the needs of small cell discovery, but also needs to be considered in the macro. The need for small-area UE mobility (such as handover), for this purpose,
Figure imgf000058_0001

所述联合判定准则包括: 将 IC-CSI-RSSI或 CSI-RSRQ, 与 RSRP (基 于 CRS的) 、 RSRQ、 CSI-RSRP的至少两个联合起来控制对同频 /异频非服 务小区 (相邻小区) 的测量。 例如, 方式 1 : 如果 IC-CSI-RSSI>threshold, 或 RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量; 方式 2: 当 IC-CSI- SSI>threshold, 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非 服务小区的测量; 方式 3: 如果 CSI-RSRQ<thresholdl , 或 RSRP小于某一基 站配置的门限,启动对非服务小区的测量;方式 4:如果 CSI-RSRQ<thresholdl 或 CSI-RSRP小于某一基站配置的门限, 启动对非服务小区的测量。 如果测 量的启动只针对小小区发现, 也可以将 IC-CSI-RSSI、 CSI-RSRQ, RSRP (基 于 CRS的) 、 RSRQ、 CSI-RSRP中的至少两个联合起来控制对小小区的测 量, 具体的例子将上面的 4种方式中的条件判断的 "或" 关系改成 "且" 关 系就可以了。 用单个条件的判断准则, 在单个条件的判断准则满足时再执行联合判定准 贝' J , 具体的例子如下: 首先或缺省采用基于 CRS的 RSRP的判定准则, 当 基于 CRS测量值 RSRP小于预定义的或基站配置的门限值时, 再执行联合 判定准则以通过新的测量(例如 IC-CSI-RSSI或 CSI-RSRQ的测量 )来确定 是否启动同频或异频测量。 又例如, 特定传输模式下的 UE使用联合判定准 则进行测量控制。 基站也可以显示地或隐含地通过信令指示 UE执行联合判 定准则, 这些信令包括 Radio Resource Control ( RRC ) 层 IE, MAC层控制 元 control element, 物理层下行控制信息 ( downlink control information, 缩 写为 DCI ) 。 The joint decision criterion includes: combining IC-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ with at least two of RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP to control a co-frequency/inter-frequency non-serving cell (adjacent Measurement of the cell). For example, mode 1: if IC-CSI-RSSI>threshold, or RSRP is smaller than a threshold configured by a certain base station, start measurement of a non-serving cell; mode 2: when IC-CSI-SSI>threshold, or CSI-RSRP is smaller than a certain A threshold configured by a base station, starting measurement of a non-serving cell; mode 3: if CSI-RSRQ<thresholdl, or RSRP is smaller than a threshold configured by a certain base station, starting measurement of a non-serving cell; mode 4: if CSI-RSRQ< Threshold Or the CSI-RSRP is smaller than the threshold configured by a certain base station, and the measurement of the non-serving cell is started. If the start of the measurement is only for small cell discovery, at least two of IC-CSI-RSSI, CSI-RSRQ, RSRP (CRS-based), RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP may be combined to control measurement of the small cell, specifically The example changes the "or" relationship of the conditional judgments in the above four ways to the "and" relationship. Using the criterion of a single condition, the joint decision criterion is executed when the criterion of the single condition is satisfied. The specific examples are as follows: First or default, the criterion of RSRP based on CRS is adopted, when the RSRP based on the CRS measurement value is less than the pre- When a defined or base station configured threshold is used, a joint decision criterion is then performed to determine whether to initiate an intra-frequency or inter-frequency measurement by a new measurement, such as an IC-CSI-RSSI or CSI-RSRQ measurement. As another example, UEs in a particular transmission mode use joint decision criteria for measurement control. The base station may also indicate, by means of signaling, the UE to perform joint determination criteria, including Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer IE, MAC layer control element control element, and downlink control information (abbreviation). For DCI).

步驟 1105: UE开启对非服务小区的测量。  Step 1105: The UE starts measurement of the non-serving cell.

具体启动对相邻小区(或小小区)的测量的方式至少有以下两种: 方式 一, 服务基站已经为 UE配置了相邻小区 (或小小区) 的测量, 但该测量需 要等待 UE对具体条件的判定才能启动; 方式二, UE在判定满足 (基站配 置的)上报条件后向服务基站报告测量结果或发送特定的指示(例如强干扰 指示) , 基站根据测量结果或特定的指示(例如强干扰指示)进行相邻小区 (或小小区)的测量配置(和 /或测量的启动) 。 这样, 可以使得宏 UE只有 在靠近小小区的局部区域才执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 在远离小小 区的大部分区域内都不需要执行对非服务小区 /小小区的测量, 从而既减少 了由于测量导致的耗电和计算开销, 也能够及时的发现小小区并通过切换 / 分流到小小区或以小小区作为辅载波来提升服务质量(包括吞吐量), 减少 宏小区的负荷。 -, 以上实例中服务小区或小小区不仅可以使用授权频段(例如 IMT频段), 还可以使用非授权频段(例如无线局域网 WLAN可以使用的频段) , 也就 是说, UE对指定的下行信号对应的资源单元(RE ) 上信号的接收强度的测 量可以在非授权频段进行。这种情况下, 当服务小区是 LTE小区(例如 LTE 非授权频段 LTE-unlicensed缩写为 LTE-U小区) , 小小区则可以是 WLAN 小区或者其它 LTE-U小区; 这样, UE对 LTE-U小区的指定的下行信号对 应的资源单元 (RE ) 上, 信号的接收强度的测量可以判断出是否有相邻小 小区 (比如说 LTE-U小区或者 WLAN小区) , 以及相邻小小区的信号强度 (即相邻小区的总信号强度) , 这可以用于启动对相邻小小区的测量, 以及 UE聚合载波的选择, 以及 scell的激活和配置。 The method for specifically starting the measurement on the neighboring cell (or the small cell) is as follows: In the first mode, the serving base station has configured the measurement of the neighboring cell (or small cell) for the UE, but the measurement needs to wait for the UE to specifically The determination of the condition can be started. In the second mode, the UE reports the measurement result to the serving base station or sends a specific indication (such as a strong interference indication) after determining that the (base station configured) reporting condition is met, and the base station according to the measurement result or a specific indication (for example, strong) Interference indication) Perform measurement configuration (and/or start of measurement) of a neighboring cell (or small cell). In this way, the macro UE can perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell only in a local area close to the small cell, and does not need to perform measurement on the non-serving cell/small cell in most areas away from the small cell, thereby It not only reduces the power consumption and computational overhead caused by the measurement, but also can detect small cells in time and improve the quality of service (including throughput) by switching/diverting to small cells or using small cells as secondary carriers, reducing the load of macro cells. . -, In the above example, the serving cell or the small cell can use not only the licensed frequency band (for example, the IMT frequency band) but also the unlicensed frequency band (for example, the frequency band that the wireless local area network WLAN can use), that is, the resource unit corresponding to the specified downlink signal by the UE. The measurement of the received strength of the signal on (RE) can be performed in an unlicensed band. In this case, when the serving cell is an LTE cell (for example, LTE unlicensed band LTE-unlicensed is abbreviated as LTE-U cell), the small cell may be a WLAN cell or other LTE-U cell; thus, the UE pairs the LTE-U cell. On the resource unit (RE) corresponding to the designated downlink signal, the measurement of the received strength of the signal can determine whether there is a neighboring small cell (such as an LTE-U cell or a WLAN cell), and the signal strength of the adjacent small cell ( That is, the total signal strength of the neighboring cells, which can be used to initiate measurement of neighboring small cells, as well as selection of UE aggregated carriers, and activation and configuration of scells.

以上所述, 仅为本发明的较佳实施例而已, 并非用于限定本发明的保护 范围。  The above is only the preferred embodiment of the present invention and is not intended to limit the scope of the present invention.

Claims

权利要求书 claims 1、 一种控制用户设备 UE进行测量的方法, 该方法包括: 1. A method for controlling user equipment UE to perform measurements. The method includes: UE测量第一下行信号对应的资源单元 RE上的干扰强度, 基于所述干 扰强度确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量。 The UE measures the interference intensity on the resource unit RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, and determines whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell based on the interference intensity. 2、 根据权利要求 1所述的方法, 其中, 所述 UE测量指定的第一下行 信号对应的 RE上信号的干扰强度之前, 该方法还包括: 2. The method according to claim 1, wherein before the UE measures the interference strength of the signal on the RE corresponding to the designated first downlink signal, the method further includes: 所述 UE接收第一下行信号的测量配置信息; The UE receives measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal; 其中, 所述测量配置信息为第一下行信号的资源位置信息, 包括以下至 少之一: 子帧配置信息、频域配置信息、 端口信息; 所述第一下行信号包括: 信道状态信息参考信号 CSI-RS、 或小区级参考信号 CRS、 或同步信号 SS、 或发现信号。 Wherein, the measurement configuration information is the resource location information of the first downlink signal, including at least one of the following: subframe configuration information, frequency domain configuration information, port information; the first downlink signal includes: channel state information reference The signal CSI-RS, or the cell-level reference signal CRS, or the synchronization signal SS, or the discovery signal. 3、 根据权利要求 2所述的方法, 其中, 所述 UE测量第一下行信号对 应的 RE上的干扰强度, 包括: 3. The method according to claim 2, wherein the UE measures the interference intensity on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, including: UE测量零功率第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强度并将其作为所述 干扰强度。 The UE measures the reception intensity on the RE corresponding to the zero-power first downlink signal and uses it as the interference intensity. 4、 根据权利要求 2所述的方法, 其中, 所述 UE测量第一下行信号对 应的 RE上的干扰强度, 包括: 4. The method according to claim 2, wherein the UE measures the interference intensity on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, including: UE测量第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强度以及第一下行信号接收 功率, 并将二者之差作为所述干扰强度。 The UE measures the received strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal and the received power of the first downlink signal, and uses the difference between the two as the interference strength. 5、 根据权利要求 2所述的方法, 其中, 所述 UE测量第一下行信号对 应的 RE上的干扰强度, 包括: 5. The method according to claim 2, wherein the UE measures the interference intensity on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal, including: UE测量经过对第一下行信号进行干扰消除操作之后的第一下行信号对 应的 RE上的接收强度, 并将该接收强度作为所述干扰强度。 The UE measures the reception intensity on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal after performing the interference cancellation operation on the first downlink signal, and uses the reception intensity as the interference intensity. 6、 根据权利要求 2所述的方法, 其中, 所述基于所述干扰强度确定是 否开启对非服务小区的测量, 包括: 6. The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining whether to enable measurement of non-serving cells based on the interference intensity includes: 所述 UE测量指定的第二下行信号的接收功率, 根据所述第二下行信号 的接收功率与所述干扰强度之间的比值, 确定是否开启对非服务小区的测 量; The UE measures the received power of the specified second downlink signal, according to the second downlink signal The ratio between the received power and the interference intensity determines whether to enable measurement of non-serving cells; 其中, 所述第二下行信号的接收功率为参考信号接收功率 RSRP, 或信 道状态信息参考信号接收功率 CSI-RSRP, 或同步信号接收功率。 Wherein, the received power of the second downlink signal is reference signal received power RSRP, or channel state information reference signal received power CSI-RSRP, or synchronization signal received power. 7、 根据权利要求 1 所述的方法, 其中, 所述确定是否开启对非服务小 区的测量, 包括: 7. The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining whether to enable measurement of non-serving cells includes: 当所述 UE确定所述干扰强度高于或不低于启动对非服务小区进行测量 的门限值时, 对非服务小区进行测量。 When the UE determines that the interference intensity is higher than or not lower than the threshold value for initiating measurement of the non-serving cell, measurement is performed on the non-serving cell. 8、 根据权利要求 6所述的方法, 其中, 所述确定是否开启对非服务小 区的测量, 包括: 8. The method according to claim 6, wherein the determining whether to enable measurement of non-serving cells includes: 利用所述干扰强度、所述第二下行信号的接收功率与干扰强度之间的比 值、 RSRP、 RSRQ、 以及 CSI-RSRP中至少两个参数, 控制对非服务小区的 测量。 The measurement of the non-serving cell is controlled using at least two parameters among the interference intensity, the ratio between the received power of the second downlink signal and the interference intensity, RSRP, RSRQ, and CSI-RSRP. 9、 根据权利要求 1至 8任一项所述的方法, 其中, 所述基于所述干扰 强度确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量之后, 该方法还包括: 开启对非服务 小区的测量; 9. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein, after determining whether to enable measurement of non-serving cells based on the interference intensity, the method further includes: enabling measurement of non-serving cells; 其中, 所述开启对非服务小区的测量包括: Wherein, the enabling of measurement of non-serving cells includes: 所述 UE自行启动对非服务小区的测量; The UE automatically initiates measurement of non-serving cells; 或者, 所述 UE向服务基站报告测量结果或发送强干扰指示, 所述服务 基站配置对非服务小区的测量。 Alternatively, the UE reports the measurement result or sends a strong interference indication to the serving base station, and the serving base station configures the measurement of the non-serving cell. 10、 根据权利要求 2所述的方法, 其中, 所述 UE接收第一下行信号的 测量配置信息之前, 该方法还包括: 10. The method according to claim 2, wherein before the UE receives the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal, the method further includes: UE所在宏小区对应的服务基站与小小区对应的小型基站, 通过 X2接 口、 或 S1接口、 或网管 OAM、 或 UE对第一下行信号的配置进行协调。 The serving base station corresponding to the macro cell where the UE is located and the small base station corresponding to the small cell coordinate the configuration of the first downlink signal through the X2 interface, or S1 interface, or network management OAM, or the UE. 11、 根据权利要求 1至 8任一项所述的方法, 其中, 所述第一下行信号 的资源包括: 授权频段的资源和非授权频段的资源; 11. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the resources of the first downlink signal include: resources of a licensed frequency band and resources of an unlicensed frequency band; 当所述第一下行信号的资源为所述非授权频段的资源时,除基于所述干 扰强度确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量之外, 所述方法还包括: 选择 UE 聚合载波、 以及激活和配置辅小区 scell。 When the resource of the first downlink signal is the resource of the unlicensed frequency band, in addition to the resource based on the interference In addition to determining whether to enable measurement of non-serving cells based on interference intensity, the method also includes: selecting a UE aggregation carrier, and activating and configuring the secondary cell scell. 12、 一种控制 UE进行测量的装置, 所述装置包括: 测量模块和决策模 块; 其中, 12. A device for controlling a UE to perform measurements, the device includes: a measurement module and a decision-making module; wherein, 测量模块, 配置为测量指定的第一下行信号对应的 RE上的干扰强度, 并把所述干扰强度发送给决策模块; The measurement module is configured to measure the interference intensity on the RE corresponding to the specified first downlink signal, and send the interference intensity to the decision-making module; 决策模块, 配置为根据测量模块发来的所述 RE上第一下行信号的干扰 强度, 确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量。 The decision-making module is configured to determine whether to enable measurement of the non-serving cell based on the interference intensity of the first downlink signal on the RE sent by the measurement module. 13、 根据权利要求 12所述的装置, 其中, 所述装置还包括: 接收模块, 配置为接收并保存第一下行信号的测量配置信息,并将第一下行信号的测量 配置信息发送给测量模块; 13. The device according to claim 12, wherein the device further includes: a receiving module configured to receive and save the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal, and send the measurement configuration information of the first downlink signal to measurement module; 相应的, 所述测量模块, 配置为接收并保存接收模块发来的测量配置信 其中, 所述测量配置信息为第一下行信号的资源位置信息, 包括以下至 少之一: 子帧配置信息、频域配置信息、 端口信息; 所述第一下行信号包括: 信道状态信息参考信号 CSI-RS、 或小区级参考信号 CRS、 或同步信号 SS、 或发现信号。 Correspondingly, the measurement module is configured to receive and save the measurement configuration information sent by the receiving module, wherein the measurement configuration information is the resource location information of the first downlink signal, including at least one of the following: subframe configuration information, Frequency domain configuration information, port information; The first downlink signal includes: channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, or cell-level reference signal CRS, or synchronization signal SS, or discovery signal. 14、 根据权利要求 13所述的装置, 其中, 14. The device according to claim 13, wherein, 所述测量模块, 配置为测量零功率第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强 度并将其作为所述干扰强度。 The measurement module is configured to measure the reception intensity on the RE corresponding to the zero-power first downlink signal and use it as the interference intensity. 15、 根据权利要求 13所述的装置, 其中, 15. The device according to claim 13, wherein, 所述测量模块, 配置为测量第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强度以及 第一下行信号接收功率, 并将二者之差作为所述干扰强度。 The measurement module is configured to measure the reception intensity on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal and the first downlink signal reception power, and use the difference between the two as the interference intensity. 16、 根据权利要求 13所述的装置, 其中, 16. The device according to claim 13, wherein, 所述测量模块,配置为测量经过对第一下行信号进行干扰消除操作之后 的第一下行信号对应的 RE上的接收强度, 并将该接收强度作为所述干扰强 The measurement module is configured to measure the reception strength on the RE corresponding to the first downlink signal after the interference cancellation operation is performed on the first downlink signal, and use the reception strength as the interference strength. 17、 根据权利要求 13所述的装置, 其中, 17. The device according to claim 13, wherein, 所述决策模块, 配置为测量指定的第二下行信号的接收功率, 根据所述 第二下行信号的接收功率与所述干扰强度之间的比值以及判定准则,确定是 否开启对非服务小区的测量; 其中, 所述第二下行信号的接收功率为参考信 号接收功率 RSRP, 或信道状态信息参考信号接收功率 CSI-RSRP, 或同步信 号接收功率。 The decision-making module is configured to measure the received power of a designated second downlink signal, and determine whether to enable measurement of non-serving cells based on a ratio between the received power of the second downlink signal and the interference intensity and a determination criterion. ; Wherein, the received power of the second downlink signal is reference signal received power RSRP, or channel state information reference signal received power CSI-RSRP, or synchronization signal received power. 18、 根据权利要求 12所述的装置, 其中, 18. The device according to claim 12, wherein, 所述决策模块, 配置为执行判定准则; 其中, 所述判定准则, 包括: 当 所述 UE确定所述干扰强度高于或不低于所述启动对非服务小区进行测量的 门限值时, 对非服务小区进行测量。 The decision-making module is configured to execute determination criteria; wherein, the determination criteria include: when the UE determines that the interference intensity is higher than or not lower than the threshold value for initiating measurement of non-serving cells, Measurements are performed on non-serving cells. 19、 根据权利要求 17所述的装置, 其中, 19. The device according to claim 17, wherein, 所述决策模块, 配置为执行判定准则; 其中, 所述判定准则, 包括: 利 用所述干扰强度、 所述第二下行信号的接收强度与干扰强度之间的比值、 RSRP、 RSRQ、 以及 CSI-RSRP中至少两个参数,控制对非服务小区的测量。 The decision-making module is configured to execute decision criteria; wherein, the decision criteria include: using the interference intensity, the ratio between the reception intensity of the second downlink signal and the interference intensity, RSRP, RSRQ, and CSI- At least two parameters in RSRP control the measurement of non-serving cells. 20、 根据权利要求 12至 19任一项所述的装置, 其中, 20. The device according to any one of claims 12 to 19, wherein, 所述决策模块, 配置为开启对非服务小区的测量; The decision-making module is configured to enable measurement of non-serving cells; 其中, 所述开启对非服务小区的测量包括: 所述 UE自行启动对非服务 小区的测量; 或者, 所述 UE向服务基站报告测量结果或强干扰指示, 以便 所述服务基站配置对非服务小区的测量。 Wherein, the turning on the measurement of the non-serving cell includes: the UE automatically initiates the measurement of the non-serving cell; or, the UE reports the measurement result or strong interference indication to the serving base station so that the serving base station configures the measurement of the non-serving cell. Measurements of the neighborhood. 21、 根据权利要求 12至 19任一项所述的装置, 其中, 所述第一下行信 号的资源包括: 授权频段的资源和非授权频段的资源; 21. The device according to any one of claims 12 to 19, wherein the resources of the first downlink signal include: resources of a licensed frequency band and resources of an unlicensed frequency band; 所述决策模块,配置为当所述第一下行信号的资源为所述非授权频段的 资源时, 除基于所述干扰强度确定是否开启对非服务小区的测量之外, 选择 聚合载波、 以及激活和配置辅小区 scell。 The decision-making module is configured to select an aggregation carrier when the resource of the first downlink signal is a resource of the unlicensed frequency band, in addition to determining whether to enable measurement of non-serving cells based on the interference intensity, and Activate and configure the secondary cell scell.
PCT/CN2014/071289 2013-02-06 2014-01-23 Method and device for controlling user equipment to take measurements Ceased WO2014121697A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201310048171.7A CN103974316B (en) 2013-02-06 2013-02-06 A kind of method and device that control user equipment measures
CN201310048171.7 2013-02-06

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014121697A1 true WO2014121697A1 (en) 2014-08-14

Family

ID=51243245

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2014/071289 Ceased WO2014121697A1 (en) 2013-02-06 2014-01-23 Method and device for controlling user equipment to take measurements

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN103974316B (en)
WO (1) WO2014121697A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105592495A (en) * 2014-10-24 2016-05-18 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for configuring different frequency measurement threshold
EP3185633A4 (en) * 2014-08-22 2017-08-23 ZTE Corporation Method and device for sending discovery signal on unlicensed carrier, and access point
WO2021159424A1 (en) * 2020-02-14 2021-08-19 Nokia Shanghai Bell Co., Ltd. Methods and apparatuses for controlling csi-rs measurement
US20240172015A1 (en) * 2021-03-31 2024-05-23 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Start control method for measurement for non-serving cell, communication device, and storage medium

Families Citing this family (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3182750B1 (en) * 2014-09-25 2019-09-04 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Radio signal measurement method and device
EP3361772B1 (en) * 2015-11-16 2022-01-05 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method for cell measurement report and user equipment
CN107888236B (en) 2016-09-30 2021-06-29 华为技术有限公司 A method and apparatus for data transmission
CN108811010B (en) * 2017-05-05 2023-10-03 华为技术有限公司 Mobility measurement method, CSI-RS resource configuration method and equipment
US10750466B2 (en) * 2017-06-16 2020-08-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Reference signal (RS) configuration and transmission from serving and neighbor cell for mobility
CN115379495B (en) * 2017-06-28 2025-02-21 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Method for determining between on-frequency operation and off-frequency operation
CN109802778B (en) * 2017-11-16 2020-09-29 华为技术有限公司 Method, device and system for indicating and determining time domain resources
CN110896550A (en) 2018-09-12 2020-03-20 索尼公司 Electronic device and method for wireless communication, computer-readable storage medium
CN111182578A (en) * 2018-11-09 2020-05-19 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 Measurement reporting method, measurement configuration method, terminal and network side equipment
CN110381531B (en) * 2019-08-16 2021-05-25 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 Measurement configuration and reporting method, device and user equipment
EP4190007B1 (en) * 2020-07-31 2025-05-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Inter-cell mobility across serving and non-serving cells

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102440022A (en) * 2010-06-17 2012-05-02 联发科技股份有限公司 Measurement configuration in a multi-carrier OFDMA wireless communication system
CN102572979A (en) * 2012-02-29 2012-07-11 电子科技大学 Disturbance control starting method based on registration in long term evolution (LTE) heterogeneous network
CN102771069A (en) * 2010-02-23 2012-11-07 Lg电子株式会社 Method and user equipment for measuring interference, and method and base station for receiving interference information

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011021387A1 (en) * 2009-08-19 2011-02-24 パナソニック株式会社 Interference-control method and femto base station
CN102056211A (en) * 2009-10-28 2011-05-11 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 Method and system for triggering neighbor cell measurement

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102771069A (en) * 2010-02-23 2012-11-07 Lg电子株式会社 Method and user equipment for measuring interference, and method and base station for receiving interference information
CN102440022A (en) * 2010-06-17 2012-05-02 联发科技股份有限公司 Measurement configuration in a multi-carrier OFDMA wireless communication system
CN102572979A (en) * 2012-02-29 2012-07-11 电子科技大学 Disturbance control starting method based on registration in long term evolution (LTE) heterogeneous network

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3185633A4 (en) * 2014-08-22 2017-08-23 ZTE Corporation Method and device for sending discovery signal on unlicensed carrier, and access point
US12028201B2 (en) 2014-08-22 2024-07-02 Zte Corporation Method and device for sending discovery signal on unlicensed carrier, and access point
CN105592495A (en) * 2014-10-24 2016-05-18 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for configuring different frequency measurement threshold
CN105592495B (en) * 2014-10-24 2020-08-04 南京中兴软件有限责任公司 Pilot frequency measurement threshold configuration method and device
WO2021159424A1 (en) * 2020-02-14 2021-08-19 Nokia Shanghai Bell Co., Ltd. Methods and apparatuses for controlling csi-rs measurement
US20240172015A1 (en) * 2021-03-31 2024-05-23 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Start control method for measurement for non-serving cell, communication device, and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN103974316B (en) 2019-07-19
CN103974316A (en) 2014-08-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2014121697A1 (en) Method and device for controlling user equipment to take measurements
JP6765304B2 (en) Communications system
JP5855280B2 (en) User apparatus, radio network node, and method thereof
US9337972B2 (en) Method for instructing user terminal to alleviate interference in a base station
JP6130836B2 (en) Extended local access in mobile communications using FDD resource allocation
JP5961685B2 (en) Method and apparatus for expanding the range of adjacent cells
CN104904259B (en) Methods to obtain measurements in the presence of strong and/or high interference
JP6096310B2 (en) Methods and devices related to effective measurements with reduced interference
US9622281B2 (en) Method and apparatus for radio resource aggregation in multi-carrier telecommunication networks
JP2021052434A (en) Mobile communication system, base station, and mobile terminal
US10045242B2 (en) User terminal, radio base station and inter-frequency measurement method
WO2022084955A1 (en) L1/l2-centric mobility - neighbour cell measurements
WO2013178102A1 (en) Indication method and device for measurement parameter
JP2013526155A (en) Method and apparatus for radio resource management measurement of user equipment in heterogeneous network
EP3142421B1 (en) Device to device proximity service for terminals served by different cells
WO2016020750A2 (en) Methods and apparatuses for measurement enhancement in communication system
JP2019106710A (en) Wireless station and wireless terminal
CN104185222A (en) Cell handover and activation in heterogeneous networks
WO2012107986A1 (en) Wireless communication terminal, wireless communication device and wireless communication system, as well as measuring method
WO2013170713A1 (en) Measurement management method, network side device, measurement method, and user equipment
WO2015042877A1 (en) Method and apparatus for supporting user equipment to execute task
WO2014023254A1 (en) Switch or bearer separation judging and measurement report method and device
CN104125601B (en) Use method of frequency band numbers and frequency point numbers of UDD cells
CN105392148A (en) Signal measurement and reporting method, user equipment, and base station
EP2888912B1 (en) Low-power carrier type and related methods and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14749682

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14749682

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1